PA10SS - Notes - Social Science For NTSE Stage-1 - Punjab - Module-1 (A)

You might also like

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 140

ALLEN Social Science

1. PHYSICAL FEATURES OF PUNJAB AND THEIR INFLUENCE ON ITS HISTORY

The word ‘Punjab’ is a combination of the two Persian words ‘Punj” and “Aab’, Punj means five and Aab means
water. Thus Punjab means a land of five rivers. These rivers are the Satlui, the Beas the Ravi, the Chenab and
the Jhelum. Punjab is situated on the North-Western frontiers of India.

n Changes in the Name of Punjab

Punjab has been named differently in different times. In the Vedic-Age, the land of Punjab was called the land of
seven rivers instead of the land of five rivers. At the time, along with five rivers, in the extreme west, the river
Indus (Sindh) and in the extreme east the river Saraswati (which has become dry these days) have been described
in the Vedic literature. For this reason, the area around these seven rivers was called ‘Sapta Sindhu.

n Boundaries of Punjab at Different Times

The boundaries of Punjab have been changing frequently. The Rigvedic Punjab included the area which was
irrigated by the rivers Indus, Jhelum, Chenab, Ravi, Beas, Satluj and Saraswati. During the Mughal period,

N
Punjab was divided into two provinces-Lahore and Multan.

In 1901 A.D., Lord Curzon separated the area beyond the river Indus of Punjab and formed a new province

E
named North-West Frontier Province.

On November 1, 1966, once again the region of Punjab was limited due to the reorganisation of the state of

L
linguistic basis. Punjab was again divided and two states i.e. Punjab and Haryana were formed.

n Physical Features of Punjab

L
They history of Punjab under study, is a triangular piece of land that lies between the rivers Indus and Yamuna.

(A) The Himalayas and its North-Western Mountains.

A
(B) The Sub-Mountainous Region

(C) The Plains

l The Himalayas and its Northern and Western Mountain Ranges

The mountains of the Himalayas are in a continuous series in Punjab. There are many valleys in these
mountains. The width of these mountains is about 250 kilometres.

A continuous series of the range of the Greater Himalayas in the east spread towards Nepal and Tibet. In the
west also, it is called the greater Himalayas. The Mid Himalayas is often called the Pangi range of hills.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

l The Advantages of the Himalayas

The land of Punjab is fertile because, the people living here are economically prosperous. There are thick
forests on the Himalayas. These forests provide medicinal plants and wood because of which Punjab enjoys
good economic conditions.

The monsoons strike against the Himalayan mountains and cause rainfall. Due to the Himalayas there are
many beautiful tourist places in Punjab.

l The Sub-Mountainous Region

In the south, along with the Himalayan mountains, the ranges of the Shivalik and Kasauli form a congested
part which is known as the submountainous region of Punjab.

1
Class X ALLEN
l The Plains
The land of Punjab can be divided into two parts the ‘Eastern Plains’ and the ‘Western Plains’. The region
between the Yamuna and the Ravi is called the Eastern Plains. This area is mostly fertile. It is thickly popu-
lated. The region between the rivers Indus and Ravi is called the Western plains. The area is not as prosper-
ous as region of Eastern Plains.

} Doab Sindh Sagar


} Doab Chai
} Doab Rachna
} Doab Bari

} Doab Bist Jalandhar


n Influence of the Physical Features of Punjab on its History

l Punjab as a Gateway to India : The physical features of Punjab have greatly influenced the history of this

N
land. Its geographical conditions have made it as a ‘Gateway to India’.
l Effects of the Rivers of Punjab : The rivers of Punjab have deeply influenced its history. These rivers act
like boundaries between the states because of their continuous flow throughout the year.

E
l Effects on the temperament of the Punjabis : The physical features of Punjab had not only influenced
its political condition but also the culture of the punjabis.

L
l Mostly Punjab remained under the Foreign Rulers : Whenever any foreign invader made a plan to
conquer India, he made Punjab his first target.

A L CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

2
ALLEN Social Science
PHYSICAL FEATURES OF THE PUNJAB AND THEIR EXERCISE

1. Punjab is the land of how many rivers? 11. Which types of crops are grown in the sub
(1) Five (2) Four mountainous regions of Punjab ?
(3) Three (4) Six (1) Wheat (2) Maize
2. The Indian Punjab Known as the ______ (3) Rice (4) All of these

(1) West Punjab (2) East Punjab 12. The region between every two rivers was called a
_____.
(3) North Punjab (4) South Punjab
(1) Doab (2) Punjab
3. The area drained by seven rivers is known as _____.
(3) Terai (4) None of these
(1) Sapta Sindhu (2) Indus
13. Which doab is situated between the river Beas and
(3) Sapta Hindu (4) Sapta sind River Ravi ?
4. Which Chinese traveller,called the region between (1) Doab Bist Jalandhar (2) Doab Bari
the Indus and the Beas foothills to Panchnada as
(3) Doab Rachna (4) Doab Chaj
Tsekai ?

N
14. The part of plains which is between the river
(1) Fa Hein (2) Hieun Tsang Ghaggar and the river Yamuna is called _____.
(3) Kum rajva (4) Xu Shaohua (1) Bangar (2) Khadar

E
5. Which viceroy separated Delhi from Punjab and (3) Bhangar (4) Terai
made it the capital of Hindustan? 15. Which cities located on the Doab Bari ?
(1) Warren Hasting (2) Lord Harding

L
(1) Lahore (2) Amritsar
(3) Lord Wellesey (4) None of these (3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these
6. After which Indian Revolt , the British extended the 16. What is the area between the river Satluj and the

L
boundaries of Punjab upto Delhi? river Ghaggar called ?
(1) Revolt of 1856 (2) Revolt of 1858 (1) Malwa (2) Chottanagpur
(3) Revolt of 1857 (4) Revolt of 1900 (3) Deccan (4) Sirhind

A
7. Which mountains separates Lahual, Spiti and 17. All the foreign invaders from Alexander to Shah
Kangra district of Punjab from Kashmir ? Jahan had been invading India via Punjab from
(1) Himalayas (2) Aravallis Central Asia through the passes of the ________
hills.
(3) Vindhayas (4) Satpura
(1) Sulaiman (2) Kirthar
8. The Mid Himalayas is often called the__________.
(3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these
(1) Pir Panjal (2) Mahabharat
18. A part of river Ravi forms ____.
(3) Patkai (4) Pangi
(1) Indo-Pak Border (2) Indo -Afghan border
9. Which passes are located on the western hills of
(3) Indo-China Border (4) Indo Bangla Border
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History.p65"

Himalayas ?
19. Which rulers established their empire in Punjab ?
(1) Khyber (2) Kurram
(1) Alexander (2) Kushanas
(3) Tochi (4) All of these
(3) Hunas (4) All of these
10. Which beautiful tourist places were earlier located
20. Which factors depended on the strength of the
in Punjab ( Now in Himachal Pradesh)?
Punjabis ?
(1) Shimla (2) Mandi
(1) Unity (2) Liberty
(3) Solan (4) All of these (3) Development of India (4) All of these

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 1 2 1 2 2 3 1 4 4 4 4 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 4 4

3
Class X ALLEN
2. POLITICAL AND SOCIAL CONDITIONS OF PUNJAB
BEFORE GURU NANAK DEV JI
n Introduction
Guru Nanak Dev Ji was born in 1469 A.D. Political and social conditions of Punjab were despicable before his
birth. The rulers were weak and divided. Punjab as facing external aggressions.
n Political Conditions
l Punjab under the Rule of the Lodhi Sultans
} Behlol Khan Lodhi, 1451-1489 A.D. : After becoming the Sultan of Delhi Behlol Khan Lodhi ap-
pointed Tatar Khan Nizam of Punjab and Shahzada Nizam Khan, the Nizam (Sikandar Lodhi) of Sirhind.
} Sikandar Lodhi 1489, 1517 A.D. : After the death of Behlol Lodhi Sikandar Lodhi became the
Sultan of Delhi. He is known as a famous Sultan of the Lodhi dynasty.
} Ibrahim Lodhi, 1517-1526 A.D. : Ibrahim Lodhi ascended the throne after Sikandar Lodhi. He was
a wise and an intelligent ruler. He was a brave soldier and to a great extent a successful general also.
l Alliance between Daulat Khan Lodhi and Babur

N
In 1519 A.D., Zahir-ud-Din Babur, the king of Kabul invaded Punjab. Firstly, Babur conquered Bajaur.
l Alam Khan and Punjab
The Afghan chiefs were angry with Ibrahim Lodhi due to his bad behaviour. To show their anger, they

E
planned to enthrone Alam Khan as the Sultan of Delhi.
l Babur’s Conquest of Punjab
In November 1525 A.D. Babur proceeded from Kabul to Punjab with 12,000 Soldiers. First of all Babur

L
decided to punish Daulat Khan Lodhi. Daulat Khan Lodhi with his son Gazi Khan fled from Lahore when he
came to know of the bad intentions of Babur. At last Daulat Khan Lodhi surrendered before Babur.

L
n Social Condition
The society before Guru Nank Dev Ji was divided mainly into two parts - the Muslim society and the Hindu
society.
l Social condition of the Muslims : At that time the Muslim society was divided into four classes. Amirs and

A
Sardars, Ulema and Sayyids, middle class and slaves.
} Amirs and Sardars : They belonged to high class and were given high jobs. The Sardars were given
lands. They collected the land revenue.
} Ulemans and Sayyids : The religious class of the Muslims was also divided into classes. The Ulemas
were the leaders of the religious class.
} Middle Class : The Goverment employees, soldiers, traders and farmers belonged to this class.
} Slaves : The workers (weavers, potters, labourers, slaves and eunuchs (Khusras) had the lowest position
in the Muslim society).
l Dress of the Muslims : The Muslims belonging to high class wore gaudy and expensive dresses.
l Ornaments : The officers used to wear rings of gold and silver.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

l Entertainment : Chess, Chauser, (dice), horse riding, horse etc. were the favourite games of sardars and
chiefs.
l Superstitions and Ignorance : With the increase of goods and wealth, there was also an increase in
superstitions among the Muslims.
n Social Condition of the Hindus
l Caste System : The Hindu society was divided into Brahimns, Kshatriyas Vaish and Shudras.
l Food : Hindus took simple and vegetarian food. Mostly the food of the common Hindus was cereals, vegeta-
bles, wheat, rice, milk, curd and ghee.
l Dress : The Hindus dressed poorly as compared to Muslims.
l Entertainment : The Hindus had meagre economic resources at that time.
l Superstitions and Ignorance : The Hindus at that time were illiterate and ignorant.
l Position of Women : Before Guru Nanak Dev Ji, the position of women was deplorable.

4
ALLEN Social Science
POLITICAL AND SOCIAL CONDITIONS OF PUNJAB
BEFORE GURU NANAK DEV JI EXERCISE
1. Guru Nanak was born in which A.D? 12. In November 1525 A.D. Babur proceeded from
(1) 1469 (2)1498 Kabul to Punjab with ______ soldiers .
(3) 1456 (4) 1415 (1) 13000 (2) 12000
2. Which Lodhi ruler lost control over the sub-provinces (3) 14000 (4) 11000
of south Punjab ?
13. The society before Guru Nanak Dev Ji was divided
(1) Sikandar Lodhi (2) Behlol Khan Lodhi into ____.
(3) Ibrahim Lodhi (4) Daulat Lodhi
(1) Hindu society (2) Muslim Society
3. Which ruler of Lodhi dynasty derived pleasure in
(3) Both (1) & (2) (4) none of these
destroying the Hindu idols and temples?
(1) Sikandar Lodhi (2) Behlol Khan Lodhi 14. Who belonged to high class and were given high
(3) Ibrahim Lodhi (4) Daulat Lodhi jobs ?

N
4. Which ruler ascended throne after Sikandar Lodhi ? (1) Amirs and Sardars (2) Ulemas and Sayyids
(1) Sikandar Lodhi (2) Behlol Khan Lodhi (3) Middle Class (4) Slaves
(3) Ibrahim Lodhi (4) Daulat Lodhi 15. The ______ were the leaders of the religious class

E
5. After death of Tatar Khan ,who was appointed as of Muslim.
governor of Punjab ? (1) Sayyids (2) Ulemas

L
(1) Sikandar Lodhi (2) Behlol Khan Lodhi
(3) Qazis (4) None of these
(3) Ibrahim Lodhi (4) Daulat Lodhi
16. Who was given the task of dispensing Justice ?
6. Babur reached near ______ in 1524 A.D.

L
(1) Sheikhs (2) Mullahs
(1) Lahore (2) Hyderabad
(3) Karachi (4) None of these (3) Qazis (4) None of these
7. Guru Nanak Dev Ji has described the atrocities in 17. Who belonged to middle class ?

A
his _____. (1) Government employees
(1) Baburbani (2) Baburpani (2) Soliders
(3) Tuzuk-i-Babari (4) None of these
(3) Traders and farmers
8. In 1519 A.D, _______ ,the king of Kabul invaded
(4) All of these
Punjab.
(1) Zahir-ud-din Babur (2) Alexander 18. Who belonged to the Slaves ?

(3) Shah Jahan (4) Auranzab (1) Weavers (2) Potters


9. The Suba of Punjab was divided into parganas as (3) labourers (4) All of these
(1) Sirhind (2) Sultanpur 19. Which was the favourite food of Amirs, Sardars,
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History.p65"

(3) Dipalpur (4) All of these Sayyids, Sheikhs, Mullahs and Qazis ?
10. Who was the son of Daulat Khan Lodhi ? (1) Biryani (2) Korma
(1) Alam Khah (2) Dilawar khan (3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these
(3) Abdul Khan (4) Alam Shah
20. Which ornaments were wore by officer class of
11. Babur would give military assistance to _____ to muslim ?
secure the throne of Delhi .
(1) Gold (2) Silver
(1) Alam Khan (2) Abdul Fazal
(3) Pearls (4) All of these
(3) Abdul Syaddi (4) Gazi Khan

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 1 2 1 3 4 1 1 1 4 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 4 3 4

5
Class X ALLEN
3. GURU NANAK DEV JI AND HIS TEACHINGS
l Birth and Parentage : There is a controversy about the date of birth of Guru Nanak Dev ji. According to
the Janamsakhi of Bhai Ji, Guru Nanak Ji was born on full moon day of Kartika in 1469 A.D. But according
to Puratan Sakhi - Meharban and Janam Sakhi of Bhai Mani Singh, Guruji was born in Vaisakh (April)
Samvat 1526 Vikrami or April 13, 1469 A.D.
His birth place was the village Talwandi now called Nankana Sahib after Guru’s name, district Sheikhupura
in the South-West about 64 kms from Lahore.
l Childhood and Education : As a child Guru Nanak Dev Ji was exceptionally bright and serious in nature.
l Ceremony of the Sacred Thread : While Guru Nanak Devji was studying his parents wanted him to wear
the sacred thread ‘Janeu’ according to the old Sanatani (Hindu) Ritual.
l Various Occupations of Guru Nanak Dev Ji : Guru Nanak Dev ji had great interest in spiritual knowledge.
Many Pir and Fakirs used to come to jungles near Talwandi. So the Company of Saints, Pirs and Fakirs
provided Guru Nanak Ji an opportunity to gain spiritual knowledge.

N
l Marriage of Guru Nanak Dev Ji : Guru Nanak Dev Ji always remained deeply engrossed in the meditation
of God. To change his mind Mehta Ji decided to marry him off.

E
l Service at Sultanpur Lodhi : Mehta Kalu Ji sent Guru Nanak Ji to Sultanpur Lodhi in 1486-87 A.D. for
a change in place. Guruji lived there with his brother-in-law (sister Bibi Nanaki’s husband) Jai Ram.

L
l Enlightenment : According to the Janam Sakhis Guruji went to take bath in the rivult (Bein) as usual. He did
not return for three days. After three dyas of deep meditation he was spirititually enlightened. It is said that
he got enlightenment in 1499 A.D.

L
n Udasus or Travels of Guru Nanak Dev Ji
After attaining spiritual enlightenment Gurji began his Udasis (travels). The main aim behind these udasis was to

A
show the true path of life to the misled souls.
l The First Udasi : The first Udasi of Guru Nanak Sahib began approximately in 1500 A.D.
l The Second Udasi : After spending some time with his family, Guru Nanak Dev Ji started his Second Udasi
(travel) in 1514 A.D.
l The Third Udasi : In 1517 A.D. Guruji began his third Udasi (travel).
n Guru Nanak Dev Ji at Kartarpur (155-39A.D.)
In 1522 A.D, Guruji settled down at Kartarpur with his family. Till his last breath he stayed there. He wrote
Banis like Var Malhar, Vari-Majh, Var Asa, Japuji Sahib, Onkar, Patti, Thit and Bara Mah etc. at Kartapur.
The Teachings of Guru Nanak Dev Ji
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

n
Guru Nanak Dev Ji did not preach deep abstruse philosophy. To spread his teachings he used the simple
language of the people. His teachings were not imaginary but associated with real mundane life. The description
of his teachings is like this.
l Concept of God : Guru Nanak Dev Ji had deep faith in God.
} The Unity of God
} God is Omnipotent and Omnipresent
} God is Great and Supreme
} God is Formless
} God is Merciful

6
ALLEN Social Science
n Importance of the Hukam of God

Guruji writes in Japuji Sahib that who accepts the Hukam of God is spiritually inclined towards him.

l Recitation of Nam : According to him the recitation of Nam helps man become one with God.

l Self Surrender : Guru Nanak Dev Ji gave importance to surrender of self and ego.

l Importance of Guru : According to Guru Nanak Dev Ji attainment of God is impossible without the help of
Guru.

l Faith in Theory of Karma : Guru Nanak Dev Ji believed in the principles of Karma (action).

l Belief in Brotherhood : Guru Nanak Dev Ji preached brotherhood and universal brotherhood of man.

l Emphasis on Morality : Alongwith the meditation of God, Gurji laid a lot of stress on the principles of
morality.

l Sach Khand : Guru Nanak Dev Ji believed in Sach Khand. According to him Sach Khand is the mental
condition in which the difference of happiness and sadness, man and women, hope and disappointment,

N
laughing and crying high and low is removed. In this way the soul becomes one with God.

l Disbelief in Penance : Guru Nanak Dev Ji was not in favour of renouncing the world and doing penance

E
in jungles and caves.

l Condemnation of Caste System : The Hindu Society was divided into four main castes Brahmin, Kashatriya,

L
Vaish and Shudra and many sub-castes.

l Condemnation of Rituals : Guru Nanak Dev Ji Severely criticised the rituals prevalent in the society.

A L
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

7
Class X ALLEN
GURU NANAK DEV JI AND HIS TEACHINGS EXERCISE
1. Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s birth place was the village 11. Where was Guru Nanak taken captive during
Talwandi, now called Babar's invasion ?
(1) Nankana sahib (2) Sindh (1) Sayyidpur (2) Kartarpur
(3) Amritsar (4) Lahore (3) Benaras (4) Patna
2. What was the name of the mother of Guru Nanak 12. Where did Guru Nanak Dev Ji meet Vali Kandhari ?
Dev Ji ?
(1) Hasan Abdal (2) Mehta Kalu ji
(1) Seema (2) Putli bai
(3) Daulat Khan (4) None of these
(3) Tripta (4) Savita
13. Name the Gurdwara, now in Pakistan, which stands
3. At what age Guruji was sent to Pathshala ? at the place where Vali Kandhari's ego was broken.
(1) Seven (2) Eight
(1) Amar Saheb (2) Panja Saheb
(3) Six (4) Nine
(3) Baba Saheb (4) Nanak Saheb
4. What subjects did Guru Nanak Ji learn in Pathshala ?
14. After visiting which mountain Guruji came to

N
(a) Hindi (b) Devnagri
Ladakh ?
(c) Maths (d) English
(1) Shiwalik (2) Himalayas
(1) Both (1) & (2) (2) Both (2) & (4)

E
(3) Kailash (4) None of these
(3) Both (3) & (4) (4) Both (2) & (3)
15. Guruji reached the Amarnath cave in _____.
5. Which Pandit made Guru Nanak Dev Ji sit in front

L
(1) Kashmir (2) Jammu
of him and asked him to wear the sacred thred?
(1) Pt. Hardyal (2) Pt. Gopal (3) Uttarakhand (4) Punjab
16. In which year,Guru Nanak Ji started his second udasi ?

L
(3) Pt. Brij (4) None of these
6. Name the wife of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. (1) 1514 (2) 1515
(1) Bibi Sulakhani Ji (2) Bibi Chand (3) 1516 (4) 1517
17.

A
(3) Bibi Surekha (4) None of these At what place, Guru Nanak Ji settled with his
7. Name the sons of Guru Nanak Dev Ji. family ?
(1) Baba Sri Chand Ji (2) Baba Lakhmi Das Ji (1) Pakistan (2) Kartarpur
(3) Both a & b (4) None of these (3) Lahore (4) Punjab
8. What were Guru Nanak Dev Ji's travels called ? 18. Guru Sahib left for his heavenly abode on _____.
(1) Udasis (2) Ghumna (1) September 22,1539 (2) September 23,1539
(3) Firna (4) None of these (3) September 24,1539 (4) September 25,1539
9. What are the four hymns by Guru Nanak alluding 19. Guru Nanak Ji spent his how many years in
to the invasions by Babar (1483-1530 A.D.) Kartarpur as an ideal family man?
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History.p65"

collectively known as in Sikh literature ? (1) 20 (2)19 (3) 18 (4) 17


(1) Babarbani (2) Adi Sakhian
20. What is the importance of Hukam of God ?
(3) Ardas (4) Bhatt- Vahis
(1) Recitation of Nam (2) Self Surrender
10. Name the reigning Mughal ruler during Guru Nanak
(3) Importance of Guru (4) All of these
Dev Ji's time.
(1) Humayun (2) Babar
(3) Akbar (4) Shah Jahan

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 1 3 1 4 1 1 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 3 1 1 2 1 4 4

8
ALLEN Social Science
4. CONTRIBUTION OF SIKH GURUS FROM GURU ANGAD DEV
JI TO GURU TEGH BAHADUR JI
The Sikh religion spread extensively from the times of Guru Angad Dev Ji to Guru Tegh Bahdaur Ji. During the
period of these Gurus, the Gurmukhi script became prevalent. Guru Sahib strengthened the system of Langar
and Pangat.
n Contribution of Guru Angad Dev Ji (1538-1552 A.D.)
His great works are described below :
l Improvement of Gurmukhi Script
l Compilation of the Hymns of Guru Nanak Dev Ji
l Langar System
l Condemnation of Udasi Sect
l Sangat System
l Physical Training to the Sikhs

N
l Hymns of Guru Angad Dev ji
l Compilation of Janam Sakhi

E
l Foundation of Goindwal Sahib
n Contribution of Guru Amardas Ji (1552-1574 A.D.)

L
In 1552 A.D., Guru Amardas Ji became the third Guru. He undertook many commendable tasks which are as
follows :
l Construction of Baoli at Goindwal Sahib

L
l Expansion of the Langar System
l Compilation and Composition of Guru Hymns
l Manji System

A
l Separation of the Sikhs from Udasis
l Social Reforms
} Condemnation of Caste System and Untouchability
} Criticism of Sati System
} Condemnation of Purdah System
} Prohibtion of Intoxicants
} New Place of Pilgrimage
} New mode of Celebrating Festivals
} Reforms in Birth, Marriage and Death Ceremonies
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

} Akbar’s Visit to Goindwal Sahib


n Contribution of Guru Ram Das Ji (1574-1581 A.D.)
Guru Ram Das Ji, the Fourth Gure remained the Guru from 1574 A.D. to 1581 A.D. During these years, he
made the following significant contributions for the development of Sikh religion.
l Foundation of Ramdaspur or Amritsar
l Beginning of the Masand System
l Reconcilation Between Sikhs and the Udasis
l Other Measures for the Development of Sikhism
l Friendly Relations of Guru Ramdas Ji with Mughal Empror Akbar
l Principle of Hereditary Succession of Guru Gaddi

9
Class X ALLEN
n Contribution of Guru Arjan Dev Ji (1581-1606 A.D.)
Arjan Dev Ji was the Fifth Guru From 1581 A.D.-1606 A.D.
l Completion of Works of Guru Ram Das Ji
l Construction of Harimandar Sahib
l Foundation of a few Cities
l Construction of Baoli Sahib at Lahore
l Organization and Development of Masans System
l Encouragement to trading of horses
l Social Reforms
l Propagation of Sikhism
l Guru Arjan Dev Ji’s Friendly Relations with Akbar
l Sense of Self Sacrifice for Sikhism

N
n Contribution of Guru Hargobind Ji
l New Policy of Guru Hargobind Ji
} Adoption of two Swords

E
} Adoption of Royal Symbols
} Offerings of Horses and Arms to the Guru

L
} Organisation of Sikh Army
} Change in the Daily Life of Guruji

L
} Construction of Akal Takhat
} Fortification of Amritsar
n Other measures undertaken by Guru Hargobind Ji for propagation and consolidation of Sikhism

A
l Guru Hargobind Sahib Ji’s settlement at Kiratpur Sahib
l Religious Travels of Guru Hargobind Sahib Ji
l Sikh missionaries to various places
l Appointment of Guru Har Rai Ji as successor
n Contribution of Guru Har Rai Ji (1645-1661 A.D.)
After the death of Guru Hargobindji the Seventh Guru Har Rai Ji ascended th Guru Gaddi
l Preaching of Sikh Religion
l Guru Har Rai Ji Blessed Phul
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

l Help extended to Dara Shikoh


l Guru Har Rai Ji called to Delhi by Aurangzeb
l Appointment of the successor
n Contribution of Guru Har Krishan Ji (1661-1664 A.D.)
In October 1661 A.D. the Eighth Guru Har Krishan Hi ascended the Guru Gaddi.During his short period as a
Guru, he did great works for the propagation of Sikhism.
l Opposition of Ram Rai
l The Guru called to Delhi by Aurangzeb
l Guru Har Krishan Ji in Delhi
l Guru Har Krishan Ji and the Sick People

10
ALLEN Social Science
n Contribution of Guru Tegh Bahadur (1664-1675 A.D.)
In March 1664 A.D. Guru Har Krishan Ji said these words before his death in Delhi - ‘Baba Bakala. The During
this period, the this period, the works done by him are described below.
l Travels of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji
The objective of his journeys was to propagate Sikh religion and the welfare of human beings.
} Amritsar
} Walla
} Ghukewali or Guru Ka Bagh
} Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji’s Visit to Other Places of Majha
} Bakala
} Bilaspur
} Foundation of Chak Nanaki
} Saifabad

N
} Kaithal
} Kurukshetra

E
} Patna
} Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji at Dhaka

L
} Travels of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji in Bengal
} Dhubri

L
n Travels to Malwa and Bangar Regions of Punjab
In the beginning of 1672-73 A.D., Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji made up his mind to spread Sikhism in Malwa and
Bangar regions of Punjab. Historical Gurudwaras have been constructed at the places where Guruji went to

A
preach Sikhism. Journeys undertaken by Guru Sahib in this area are described below. Starting from Chakk
Nanaki, Guru Sahib went to Saifabad for the second time.
l Martyrdom of Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji : Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji went to Anandpur Sahib after visiting the
villages of Malwa.He was martyred on 11 Dec, 1675, at Chandni Chowk, Delhi.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

11
Class X ALLEN
CONTRIBUTION OF SIKH GURUS FROM GURU ANGAD DEV
JI TO GURU TEGH BAHADUR JI EXERCISE

1. In which year was Guru Angad Dev Ji born ? 11. Which city was founded by Guru Amardas Ji, where
(1) 1505 A.D (2) 1506 A.D he settled down after being appointed as Guru ?

(3) 1504 A.D. (4) 1507 A.D (1) Goindwal (2) Lahore

2. What was the original name of Guru Angad Dev Ji ? (3) Amritsar (4) Punjab

(1) Bhai Maharaj singh (2) Bhai Lehna 12. What were the three special days declared by Guru
(3) Bhai Chand (4) Bhai Kahan singh Amardas Ji when all the Sikhs were to congregate
from far and near at the Guru's place to hear his
3. Name the father of Bhai Lehna Ji.
words ?
(1) Bhai Pheru (2) Bhai Sukhdev
(1) Baisakhi (April 13),

N
(3) Bhai Amrit (4) Bhai Ajit singh
(2) Maghi (1st day of Magha, mid January)
4. In what year was Guru Angad Dev Ji appointed as
Guru ? (3) Diwali (festival of lights in October/November)

E
(1) 1539 (2) 1540 (3) 1550 (4) 1560 (4) All of these

5. Where did Guru Angad Dev Ji stay during the years 13. In which year was the first construction of Harmandir

L
that Guru Amardas Ji served him ? Saheb (Golden Temple) completed ?

(1) Khadur Saheb (1) 1589 A.D. (2) 1558 A.D

L
(2) Baba Buddha Singh ji (3) 1565 A.D (4) 1578 A.d
(3) Guru Ram Das 14. Who built the Akal Takht (then called Akal Bunga) ?

A
(4) Guru Gaddi
(1) Guru Ram Das (2) Guru Angad Dev Ji
6. When was Guru Amardas Ji appointed as Guru ?
(3) Guru Hargobind Ji (4) None of these
(1) 1553 (2) 1554 (3) 1552 (4)1560
15. Guru Hargobind Ji donned the sword as a twin
7. When was the Baoli (well) with 84 steps completed symbol of two powers. Name it.
by Guru Amardas Ji in Goindval ?
(1) Miri (Temporal Power)
(1) In 1190 A.D (2) In 1559 A.D
(2) Piri (Spiritual Power)
(3) In 1569 A.D. (4) In 1579 A.D.
(3) Both (1) & (2)
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History.p65"

8. In which year did Emperor Akbar visit Guru


Amardas Ji ? (4) None of these
(1) 1567 A.D. (2) 1568 A.D 16. Name the fortification that Guru Hargobind Ji put
(3) 1578 A.D (4) 1560 A.d up in Amritsar.

9. Guru Amardas Ji opposed the practice of _____. (1) Lohgarh (2) Dhaka
(1) Sati System (2) Purdha (3) Phula (4) Doaba
(3) Widow Remarriage (4) None of these 17. Name the reigning Mughal rulers during Guru
10. Name the children of Guru Amardas Ji. Hargobind Ji's time.

(1) Baba Mohan (2) Baba Mohri (1) Jehangir (2) Shah Jahan

(3) Both (1) & (2) (4) All of these (2) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these

12
ALLEN Social Science
18. Name the Gurdwara, now in Pakistan, that stands 22. How many children did Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji have ?
at the place where Guru Arjan Dev Ji was martyred.
(1) Five sons (2) Four sons
(1) Dehra Saheb (2) Baba Atal
(3) Two sons (4) One son
(3) Baba Bakala (3) None of these
23. Which Mughal Emperor ordered Guru Tegh
19. How old was Guru Harkrishan Ji when he received Bahadur Ji to be beheaded at Chandni Chowk, Delhi ?
the Guruship ?
(1) Aurangzeb (2) Babur
(1) 10 (2) 5 (3) 8 (4) 7
(3) Humanyu (4) Akbar
20. Which Gurdwara stands at the place of Mirza Raja
24. Where & when did Guru Tegh Bahadur Ji achieve
Jai Singh's bungalow where Guru Harkrishan Ji
martyrdom ?
stayed when he came to Delhi ?
(1) In Lucknow on November 11, 1675 A.D
(1) Gurdwara Bangla Saheb
(2) In Amritsar on November 11, 1675 A.D.
(2) Gurdwara Chaubara sahib
(3) In Delhi on November 11, 1675 A.D.
(3) Gurdwara Guru ka Mahal

N
(4) In Dehradun on November 11, 1675 A.D.
(4) Gurdwara Ramsar sahib
25. Which place is situated 6 km away from Amritsar
21. What were the last words of Guru Harkrishan Ji

E
was visited by Guru Tegh bahadur Ji
announcing the next Guru ?
(1) Walla (2) Amritsar
(1) "Baba Bakale" (2) The Ram

L
(3) Lahore (4) None of these
(3) Pir Sahib (4) None of these

A L
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History.p65"

ANSWER KEY
Q ue. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 3 2 1 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 1 4 2 3 3 1 3 1 2 1
Q ue. 21 22 23 24 25
Ans. 1 4 1 3 1

13
Class X ALLEN
5. GURU GOBIND SINGH JI’S LIFE; CREATION
OF KHALSA; HIS PERSONALITY
Guru Gobind Singh Ji was the Tenth and the last Guru of the Sikhs. Guru Nanak Dev Ji laid the foundation of
Sikh religion. Eight of Guru Nanak Dev Ji’s successors gradually preached and propagated the Sikh religion. In
1699 A.D. he gave final shape to the Sikh religion by creating the ‘Khalsa’.
n Life of Guru Gobind Singh Ji (1666-1708 A.D.)
Guru Gobind Singh Ji received good education his life time. He himself sent his father for self sacrifice.
l Birth and Parentage
l Childhood in Patna
l Dastar Bandhi Ceremony at Lakhnaur
l Education
l Attainment of Guruship and Martyrdom of Father

N
l Marriage of Guru Sahib
l Organization of Army

E
l Royal Symbols and Regal Court of the Guru
l Guru’s Activities at Paonta Sahib
l Battles of Pre-Khalsa Period

L
l Creation of the Khalsa
l Battles of Post-Khalsa Period

L
l Death of the Guru
n The creation of the Khalsa 1699 A.D.
There were some causes behind this event which were responsible for the creation of the Khalsa.

A
l Measures taken for the Development of Sikhism by the previous Nine Gurus
l Aurangzeb’s Atrocities on Hindus
l Unreliability of the king of hill states
l Rigidity of the Caste System
l Guruji’s Mission of Life
n Birth of the Khalsa
l Khande di Pahul
l Principles of the Khalsa
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

} For entering the Khalsa Panth, every one has to drink Amrit, thereafter he would be called a Khalsa.
} Every Khalsa will use ‘Singh’ with his name and a Khalsa woman will use ‘Kaur’ with her name.
} Every Khalsa will wear the five emblems (kakars) - Kes (hair), Kangha (comb), Kara (iron bangle), Kachhera
(long underwear) and Kirpan (Sword.)
n Significance and results of the creation of the Khalsa
l Completion of the work was begun by Guru Nanak Dev Ji
l End of the masand system
l Increasing importance of the Khalsa sangat
l Increase in the number of sikhs
l Infusing new spirit into the sikhs

14
ALLEN Social Science
l Successful resistance of the Mughals
l Warfare between the guru ji and the rajas of the hill states
l Separate identity of the sikh community
l Khalsa saved Hinduism from extinction
l Death blow to superstitions
l Democratic elements in sikhism
l Rise of political power of the sikhs
n The Battles of Guru Gobind Singh Ji against the political and religious tyranny
Some battles were fought before the creation of the Khalsa which were known as the Post - Khalsa Battles.
n The Battles of Pre-Khalsa Period
l Conflict with Bhim Chand Raja of Bilaspur

N
l The Battle of Bhangani, 1688 A.D.
l The Battle of Nadaun 1690 A.D.

E
l Mughal campaign against Guruji and the kings of hills states, 1694, A.D.
n Battles of Post Khalsa Period, 1699-1708 A.D.

L
l The first battle of Anandpur 1701 A.D.
l The battle of Nirmoh, 1702 A.D.

L
l The battle of Satluj, 1702 A.D.
l The battle of Basauli, 1702 A.D.
l The second battle of Anandpur Sahib, 1704 A.D.

A
l The battle of Shahi Tibbi
l The battle of Sirsa
l The battle of Chamkaur Sahib 1705 A.D.
l The battle of Khidrana, 1705 A.D.
n The personality of Guru Gobind Singh Ji
l Guruji as a person
} Impressive physique and charming personality
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

} Courageous and Fearless


} A man of strong determination
} Embodiment of sacrifice
} High moral character
} Liberal and tolerant in religious views
l As a poet and scholar
l As an organizer
l As a military general
l As a religious leader

15
Class X ALLEN
GURU GOBIND SINGH JI’S LIFE; CREATION OF KHALSA;
HIS PERSONALITY EXERCISE
1. Who was the tenth and the last Guru of the Sikhs? 11. Some battles were fought before the creation of
(1) Guru Gobind Singh (2) Guru Angad Dev Ji the Khalsa which were called
(1) Sikh Battle (2) Post Khalsa Battle
(3) Guru Hargobind Singh (4) Guru Har Krishan Ji
(3) Pre Khalsa Battle (4) None of these
2. Guru Gobind Singh Ji was born in ______.
12. Which Battle was fought between the Union of the
(1) December 25 (2) December 22 Kings of hills states and the Mughals ?
(3) December 23 (4) December 26 (1) Battle of Nadaun (2) Battle of Khidrana
3. Mata Gujri was staying with her family in (3) Battle of Sirsa (4) Battle of Chamkaur
(1) Manipur (2) Sikkim 13. Which Mughal emperor came to know about the
increasing power of Guru Gobind Rai Ji ?
(3) Patna (4) Mt.Abu
(1) Akbar (2) Shah Jahan

N
4. Gobind Rai Ji spent first ____ years of his life in
(3) Humanyun (4) Aurangzeb
Patna .
14. On which date the Battle of Khidrana took place ?
(1) Five (2) Six
(1) December 25, 1705 (2) December 26, 1705

E
(3) Seven (4) eight (3) December 27, 1705 (4) December 29,1705
5. In ________11,1675 A.D, Guru Teg Bahadur Ji 15. What was the main cause of the Battle of Bhangani ?

L
and his companions were martyred at Chandni (1) Rajas of Hills states considered military
Chowk In Delhi . preparation made by Guru Gobind Singh JI as

L
(1) November (2) December a potential danger to them
(3) October (4) July (2) Guruji was against idol worship but the Rajas of
hill state firmly believed in idol worship
6. Some scholars have mentioned that Guruji had more
(3) Guruji had an old enmity with Bhim Chand

A
than one wives
(4) All of these
(1) Mata Jito Ji (2) Mata Sundari
16. The Battle of Bhanganu comtinued for ____ hours
(3) Mata Sahib Kaur (4) All of these
on September,1688 A.D.
7. Guruji had four sons called ____ (1) Nine (2) Ten
(1) Sahibzadas (2) Bhim Chand (3) Eleven (4) Twenty
(3) Ajit Singh (4) None of these 17. Guru Sahib constructed forts at
8. Guru Gobind Rai Ji created the Khalsa on the day (1) Anandgarh (2) Kesgarh
of _____ in 1699 A.D (3) Lohgarh (4) All of these
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History.p65"

(1) Baisakhi (2) Diwali 18. In which year , Guruji left Anandpur Sahib ?
(1) 1704 (2) 1705 (3) 1706 (4) 1707
(3) Dusshera (4) Holi
19. Wazir Khan, Subedar of Sirhind with a huge army
9. How many people were present in an assembly
of ______ soliders reached in the Battle of Khidrana
held by Guru Gobind Rai Ji on the day of Baisakhi
(1) 20000 (2) 10000
at Anandpur Sahib.
(3) 30000 (4) 40000
(1) 90,000 (2) 85,000
20. How was Guruji as a person ?
(3) 45,000 (4) 80,000
(1) Charming personality
10. The Khalsa Sangat was given the right of serving (2) Courageous and Fearless
(1) Khande Di Pahul (2) Panj Piaras (3) High Moral Character
(3) Guru is in Khalsa (4) Khalsa is in Guru (4) All of these

16
ALLEN Social Science
21. How many poets did Guruji had in Paonta Sahib ? 24. Some battles were fought after the creation of
the khalsa which were known as ___.
(1) 52 (2) 54 (3) 58 (4) 60
(1) Post Khalsa Battles
22. What is the prominent compostion of Guru Gobind
Singh Ji ? (2) First Battle of Anandpur
(1) Jaap Sahib (2) Bachitar Natak (3) Battle of Satluj
(3) Zafarnama (4) All of these (4) Battle of Basauli
23. Which muslim became Guruji's close friend ? 25. What is the significance and result of the creation
of the Khalsa ?
(1) Pir Mohammad (2) Buddhu Shah
(1) Increase in the Number of Sikhs
(3) Nihang Khan (4) All of these
(2) Infusing New Spirit into the Sikhs
(3) End of Masand System
(4) All of these

E N
L L
A
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History.p65"

ANSWER KEY
Q ue. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 1 2 3 1 1 4 1 1 4 1 3 1 4 4 4 1 4 1 2 4
Q ue. 21 22 23 24 25
Ans. 1 4 4 1 4

17
Class X ALLEN
6. BANDA BAHADUR AND THE SIKH MISALS
l Rise of Banda Bahadur : Guru Gobind Singh Ji, before his death, had ordered his Sikhs to accept Guru
Granth Sahib as their religious Guru. During the last days of his life, Guruji visited the south. At Nanded
Sahib, he met Bairagi Madho Das. Guru Gobing Singh Ji baptised him as a Sikh and renamed him Gurbax
Singh. But Madho Das became popular by the name of ‘Banda Bahadur’.
l Attack on Sonepat : While advancing from Delhi to Punjab, Banda Bahadur attacked Sonepat though at
that time, he had only five hundred Sikhs in his army yet.
l Seizure of Royal Treasury of Bhoona : When Banda Bahadur reached near Kaithal from Sonepat, he
came to know that some Mughal soldiers were camping in village Bhoona with a large amount of collected
land revenue in their custody.
l Conquest of Samana : After conquering Bhoona, Banda Bahadur advanced towards Samana.
l Conquet of Ghuram : After staying for one week in Samana, Banda Bahadur attacked Ghuram.
l Attack on Kapuri : After Ghuram, Banda reached Kapuri via Thaska, Shahhad and Mustafabad.

N
l Conquest of Sadhaura : The ruler of Sadhaura Usman Khan also committed atrocities on the Hindus.
l Conquest of Mukhlispur : After Sadhaura, Banda Bahadur attacked Mukhlispur.

E
l Battle of Chappar-Chiri and Conquest of Sirhind : The real target of Banda Bahadur was to conquer
Sirhind.

L
n Administration of the conquered territories
After the victory of Sirhind, Banda Bahadur appointed Baz Singh as ruler of Sirhind.

L
l Conquest of the Ganga-Yamuna Doab : Many Hindus and Muslims began to adopt Sikhism under the
leadership of Banda Bahadur.
l Occupation of the Jalandhar Doab : After the victory of Sirhind, the Sikhs of Jalandhar Doab raised

A
their arms to finish the Mughal empire.
l Capture of Amritsar, Batala, Kalanaur and Pathankot : Like the Sikhs of Jalandhar Doab Sikhs of
this region also prepared themselves to fight against the Mughal Government to liberate themselves.
l The Haidri Flag Crusade : Encouraged by their victory, the Sikhs attacked Lahore.
n Bahadur Shah’s measures against the Sikhs
On June 27, 1710 A.D, he advanced towards Punjab from Ajmer. he ordered the subedars of Delhi and
Avadh, the nizams of Muradabad, Allahabad and fauzdars to advance towars Punjab alongwith their armies.
l Battle of Aminabad : Bahadur Shah sent a huge army underthe leadership of Firoz Khan Mewati and
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

Mahawat Khan to fight against the Sikhs.


l Battle of Sadhaura : When Banda Bahadur got the news of the defeat of Sikhs, he attacked the enemy
along with his soldiers.
l Battle of Lohgarh : Bahadur Shah also reached there by that time.
l Banda Bahadur’s activities in the Hills : After reaching the hills, Banda Bahadur sent Hukamnamas to
the Sikhs so that they could come and meet him.
l Battle of Bahrampur : When Banda Bahadur came out of the hills of Raipur and Bahrampur to attack the
plain regions, then the fauzdar Baijeed khan Kheshagi of Jammu attacked him.
l Banda Bahadur Re-established his Power : The Mughal emperor Bahadur Shah died at Lahore on
February 18, 1712 A.D.

18
ALLEN Social Science
n Farrukhsiyar’s measures against the Sikhs

After becoming emperor, Farrukhsiyar ordered the subedar of Kashmir Addus Samad Khan to act against the
Sikhs.

l Battle of Gurdas Nangal : In 1715 A.D. Banda Bahadur re-occupied Kalanaur and Batala after descending
from the hill states.

l End of Banda Bahadur : After arresting Banda Bahadur from Gurdas Nangal, he was brough to Lahore.

n The Sikh Misals

l Faizalpuria Misal : Faizalpuria Misal was the first misal to be established.

l Bhangi Misal : It was situated in the North-West of the Sutlej river.

l Ahluwalia Misal : This Misal was very powerful during the rule of Jassa Singh Ahluwalia.

l Ramgarhiya Misal : Ramgarhia Misal was one of the famous Misals of Punjab.

N
l Sukarchakiya Misal : Charat Singh was the chief of Sukarchakiya Misal.

l Kanhaiya Misal : Jai Singh Kanaheya was the chief of Kanaheya Misal.

E
l Phulkian Misal : The chief of Phulkian Misal was Chaudhari Phul (1627-1689 A.D.).

l Dallewalia Misal : Gulab Singh was the chief of Dallewalia Misal.

L
l Nakai Misal : Hira Singh was the founder of this Misal.

l Karorsinghia Misal : Karora Singh was the founder of this Misal.

L
l Nishanwalia Misal : Sangat Singh and Mohar Singh were the founders of this Misal.

l Shahid Misal : Sudha Singh was the founder of this Misal.

A
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

19
Class X ALLEN
BANDA BAHADUR AND THE SIKH MISALS EXERCISE
1. Madho das became popular by the name of 11. The Sikhs attacked Saharanpur after crossing the
(1) Banda bahadur (2) Mata Gujari which river ?

(3) Guru Tegh ji (4) None of thees (1) Yamuna (2) Ganga

2. After reaching Delhi,Banda Bahadur sent the (3) Son (4) Chambal
Hukumnamas of Guru Gobind Singh Ji to the Sikhs 12. The Sikhs changed the name of Saharanpur to
of _____.
(1) Malwa (2) Doab (1) Bahrampur (2) Bhag Nagar
(3) Majha (4) All of these (3) Lohgarh (4) Sadhaura
3. Banda Bahadur attacked attacked Samana on 13. What was written in letter sent by Banda Bahadur
________. to Jalal Khan of Unarsa ?
(1) November 26 ,1709 (2) November 27,1709

N
(1) To liberate the sikh prisoners
(3) November 25,1709 (4) November 28,1709 (2) To accept suzerainty
4. The ruler of Sadhaura Usman Khan also committed

E
(3) Both (1) & (2)
atrocities on the _____.
(4) None of these
(1) Muslims (2)Hindus

L
14. How many Sikhs occupied Amritsar and area around
(3) Christians (4) Jainism it ?
5. Which subedar of Sirhind, had troubled greatly

L
(1) 5000 (2) 6000
Guru Gobind Singh Ji ?
(3) 7000 (4) 8000
(1) Wazir Khan (2) Ahmed Khan
15. Wazir Muniyam Khan attacked the fort of Lohgarh

A
(3) Fateh Singh (4) Ranjit Singh
on ______.
6. Wazir khan killed thousand of innocent
(1) December 10, 1710
(1) Hindus (2) Sikhs
(2) December 12, 1712
(3) Both (1) & (2) (4) none of these
(3) December 13, 1713
7. How many soliders are there in Wazir Khan's army ?
(4) December 14, 1714
(1) 30000 (2) 40000
16. Which ruler showed their bravery in the Battle of
(3) 20000 (4) 50000 Bahrampur ?
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History.p65"

8. The soliders of Wazir khan consisted of ____. (1) Baz singh (2) Fateh Singh
(1) Infantry (2) artillery (3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these
(3) cavalry (4) All of these 17. The Mughal Emperor Bahadur Shah died at ______
9. Which ruler killed Wazir Khan ? on februrary 18,1712 A.D .

(1) Fateh Singh (2) Jalal Khan (1) Lahore (2) Amritsar

(3) Shamas Khan (4) Ali Hamid Khan (3) Ludhiana (4) Mysore

10. After the death of Wazir Khan, the sikhs got how 18. Which Mughal rulers of Punjab committed atrocities
much rupees from his treasury ? on th Sikhs ?

(1) 3 crore (2) 2 crore (1) Abdus Samad Khan (2) Zakariya Khan

(3) 4 crore (4) 6 Crore (3) Yahiya khan (4) All of these

20
ALLEN Social Science
19. Under the Dal Khalsa ,twelve jathas were organized 23. Who became the Leader of Ahluwalia Misal
and these were called (1) Bhag Singh (2) Sudha Singh
(1) Misals (2) Armies (3) Baba Deep Singh (4) None of these
(3) Both (1) & (2) (4) none of these
24. Which regions was under the Ramgarhiya Misal ?
20. Misals is a Arabic word meaning is
(1) Kalanaur (2) Batala
(1) Equal (2) same
(3) Qadain (4) all of these
(3) Both (1) & (2) (4) none of these
25. Which Misal is also called the 'Panjgarhia Misal' ?
21. In which year ,Ranjit Singfh became the master of
Sukarchakya Misal ? (1) Karorsinghia Misal (2) Dallewalia Misal

(1) 1798 A.D (2) 1797 A.D (3) Ramgarhiya Misal (4) Bhangi Misal
(3) 1796 A.D (4) 1795 A.D
22. Which Misal is situated in the North-west of the

N
Satluj river ?
(1) Nakai Misal (2) Shahid Misal

E
(3) Bhangi Misal (4) Kanhaiya Misal

L L
A
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History.p65"

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 1 4 1 2 1 3 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 1 3 1 4 1 3
Que. 21 22 2 24 25
Ans. 2 3 1 4 1

21
Class X ALLEN
7. RANJIT SINGH : EARLY LIFE ACHIEVEMENTS
AND ANGLO-SIKH RELATIONS
n Early Life of Ranjit Singh
l Birth : Ranjit Singh was born Nov. On 13, 1780. His father Mahan Singh was the chief of Sukarchakia
Misal. He was the grandson of Charat Singh who founded Sukarchakia Misal.
l Childhood and education : Ranjit Singh was the only son of his parents. When he was five years old, he
was five years old, he was sent to the Dharmshala of Bhia Bhagu Singh at Gujranwala for his education.
l Boy Warrior : Ranjit Singh became a worrior in his childhood. When he was ten years old, he along with his
father took part in the campaign of Sohdrah. Once Ranjit Singh was returning alone on his horse after
hunting.
l Marriage : In 1796 A.D. when he was 16 years old, he was married to Mehtab Kaur. Mehtab Kaur was
granddaughter of Jai Singh Kanahia and daughter of Gurbax Singh.

N
l Assumption of Political Power : Mahan Singh died in 1792 A.D. At that time Ranjit Singh was 12 years
old. Being minor, the reins of administration were put in the hands of his mother, Raj Kaur. She handed over
the entire administration of Sardar Lakhpat Rai.

E
n Early conquests of Ranjit Singh
In 1797 A.D., Ranjit Singh took the reins of Sukarchakia Misal in his hands. At that time only the areas of

L
Gujranwala, Wazirabad, village Dadan Khan etc. were under his Misal.
l The Conquest of Lahore, 1799 A.D.

L
l Battle of Bhasin
l Coronation of Ranjit Singh
l The conquest of Amritsar, 1805

A
l Significance of the conquest of Amristar
n The conquest of other territories of the Sikh Misals
l Friendship with strong Misals : Maharaja Ranjit Singh was a clever diplomat. Besides the conquest of
Lahore and Amritsar Maharaja Ranjit Singh conquered other Misals between 1800-1811 A.D. There are
briefly described below.
l The Conquest of Akalgarh, 1801 A.D. : After the battle of Bhasin (1801 A.D.) Dal Sing of Akalgarh
and Sahib Singh of Gujarat started preparations to attack Lahore.
l The Conquest of Chiniot, 1802 A.D. : Chiniot was in the possession of Jassa Singh, son of Karan Singh.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

n First Attack of Maharaja Ranjit Singh on Malwa, 1806 A.D.


In 1806 A.D. Maharaja Ranji Singh invaded Malwa region for the first time. In 1807 A.D., Maharaja Ranjit
Singh attacked Malwa for the second time. The cause of this attack was a fight between the ruler of Patiala,
Sahib Singh and his wife Aas Kaur.
l The Conquest of Dallewalia Misal, 1807 A.D.
l The Conquest of Sialkot, 1808 A.D.
l The Conquest of Gujarat, 1809 A.D.
l Annexation of Karorsinghia Misal’s Territory, 1809 A.D.
l Conquest of Nakkai Misal Possessions, 1801 A.D.
l Annexation of Faizalpuria Misal’s Possessions, 1811 A.D.
22
ALLEN Social Science
n Conquest of muslim territories
l The Conquest of Kasur, 1807 A.D.

l The Conquest of Jhang, 1807 A.D.

l Submission of Bahawalpur and Akhnur 1807-08 A.D.


l The Conquest of Khushab and Sahiwal 1810 A.D.
n The Conquest of hill territories
l The Conquest of Hill Territories

l The Conquest of Kangra, 1809 A.D.


n Annexation of the territories of the Friendly Misals

Maharaja Ranjit Singh was a clever diplomat. He did not think it right to fight with all the Misals as he rose to
power. Won over the weak Misals by entering into alliances with Misaldars of powerful Misals.

N
l Kanheya Misal

l Ramgarhia Misal

E
l Ahluwalia Misal

n Major conquests of Maharaja Ranjit Singh

L
The major achievement of Maharaja Ranjit Singh were the conequests are Multan, Attock Derajat, Kashmir and
Peshawar.

L
l The Conquest of Multan, June 1818 A.D.

l The Conquest of Kashmir, July 5, 1819 A.D.

l Conquest of Attock, 1816 A.D.

A
l The Conquest of Derajat, 1821 A.D.

l The Conquest of Peshawar, April 30, 1837

l Extension of Ranjit Singh’s Kingom

n Anglo-Sikh relations 1809-1839 A.D.

The friendly relations between Ranjit Singh and the Britishers began in 1805-06 A.D. In the next two years
Ranjit Singh attacked the areas across Satluj. But in 1809 A.D. treaty of Amritsar was signed between the
Maharaja and the Britishers.

l Cordial and Friendly relations with the Britishers 1812-1821 A.D.


CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

l The Question of Badhni


l The problem of Ahluwalia Possessions
l Cordial and Friendly Relations Restored, 1825-30 A.D.
l Tension and Estrangement
l The Question of Singh April 18, 1832 A.D.

l The Question of Shikarpur 1836 A.D.


l The Question of Ferozepur, 1835-38 A.D.
l Tripartite Treaty, 1838 A.D.

23
Class X ALLEN
RANJIT SINGH : EARLY LIFE ACHIEVEMENTS
AND ANGLO-SIKH RELATIONS EXERCISE
1. Ranjit singh was born on ______. 11. Maharaja Ranjit Singh conquered other Misals
(1) Nov 13, 1780 (2) Nov 14,1780 Between _______A.D.
(1) 1800-11 (2) 1813-14
(3) Nov 15,1780 (4) Nov 16,1780
(3) 1815-16 (4) 1820-21
2. Ranjit singh was 5 years old and he was sent to the
__________ of Bhai Bhagu Singh at Gujranwala 12. _______,the brother of Faqir-Aziz-ud-Din ,was made
for his education . the ruler of Gujarat.
(1) Nurudin (2) Akali Phula Singh
(1) Pathshala (2) Dharamshala
(3) Dal Singh (4) None of these
(3) Temples (4) Mosques
13. Which areas were occupied by Mohkam Chand of
3. Who was defeated once by Mahan sSingh ?
Nakkai Misal ?

N
(1) Jai Singh Kanahia (2) Raj Kaur
(1) Chunia (2) Sharakpur
(3) Hashmat Khan (4) Mahan Singh (3) Kot Kamalia (4) All of these
4. Who was the granddaughter of Jai Singh Kanahia

E
14. Who accepted to pay an annual tax of Rs. 60000
and daughter of Gurbax Singh ? to the Maharaja Ranjit Singh ?
(1) Sada Kaur (2) Mehtab Kaur (1) Ranjeet Singh (2) Jai Singh

L
(3) Raj Kaur (4) Ram Singh (3) Ahmad Khan (4) All of these
5. Who was Ranjit Singh mother-in-law ? 15. On which date, the Maharaja occupied the fort of

L
(1) Sada Kaur (2) Begum Hazrat Kangra ?
(1) 24 August, 1809 A.D (2) 25 August,1805 A.D
(3) Chand Biwi (4) Raziya sultan
(3) 26 August ,1809 A.D (4) 24 August,1810 A.D

A
6. The administration of Sukarchakia Misal remained
in the hands of ______. 16. Who tried to seek help from British Government to
fight against Ranjit Singh but he was unsuccessful ?
(1) Raj Kaur (2) Diwan Lakhpat Rai
(1) Fateh Singh (2) Jaswant Rai
(3) Sada Kaur (4) All of these
(3) Jodh Singh (4) Jahanadad Khan
7. The ______ chief became jealousof Ranjit Singh
17. Which area is situated in the north-east of Punjab
after conquest of Lahore.
on the banks of the river Indus ?
(1) Sikhs (2) Muslims
(1) Attock (2) Himalayas
(3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these
(3) Alps (4) Andes
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History.p65"

8. Imam Baksh was appointed the Kotwal of ______ 18. In which year the Conquest of Derajat took place ?
(1) Punjab (2) Amritsar (1) 1823 A.D (2) 1825 A.D
(3) Lahore (4) All of these (3) 1824 A.D (4) 1821 A.D
9. Who accepted Khalsa as a supreme power ? 19. Who was the ruler of Peshawar ?
(1) Ranjit Singh (2) Jai Singh (1) Yar Mohammad Khan (2) Mahmud Ghori
(3) Man Singh (4) Mihir Bhoj (3) Mahmud Ghazni (4) Jalal Khan
10. The military power of Ranjit Singh increased with 20. On March 14, 1823 A.D. a fierce battle took place
the victory work of ______. between the _______ at Naushehra .
(1) Patiala (2) Mysore (1) Sikhs (2) Afghans
(3) Amritsar (4) Ludhiana (3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these

24
ALLEN Social Science
21. In the last years of Maharaja Ranjit Singh's rule the 24. In November 1826 A.D , when Maharaja was ill,
total area of his empire was _______ sq. Kms . he was treated by which Doctor ?
(1) 2,24000 (2) 200000 (1) Dr. Murray (2) Dr.Reddy
(3) 300000 (4) 3,34000 (3) Dr. James (4) Dr.Smith
22. The friendly relations between Ranjit Singh and the 25. Which was an important city situated near the
Britishers began in confluences of the river Satluj and Beas?
(1) 1805-06 A.D. (2) 1807-08 A.D (1) Ferozepur (2) Vazirabad
(3) 1809-10A.D (4) 1811-12 A.D (3) Azimgarh (4) Shergarh
23. Which viceroy declared war against the Gurkhas
tribe of Nepal ?
(1) Lord William (2) Lord Canning
(3) Lord Hasting (4) None of these

E N
L L
A
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History.p65"

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 1 2 3 2 1 4 3 3 1 3 1 1 4 3 1 1 1 4 1 3
Que. 21 22 2 24 25
Ans. 1 1 3 1 1

25
Class X ALLEN
8. THE ANGLO-SIKH WARS AND ANNEXATION OF PUNJAB
n The First Anglo-Sikh War 1845-46 A.D.
After the death of Maharaja Ranjit Singh, his successors proved to be weak and incapable administrators.
n Causes
l The British policy of Encirclement of Lahore Kingdom : The British began the siege of Lahore state
during the period of Maharaja Ranjit Singh.
l Anarchy and Revolts in Punjab after Ranjit Singh : After the death of Maharaja Ranjit Singh restless-
ness and anarchy prevailed.
l Disastrous failure of the British in the First Afghan War : After the end of first Anglo-Afghan war in
November., 1841 A.D, the Afghans revolted against the British under the leadership of Mohammad Akbar
Khan, son of Dost Khan.
l Annexation of Sindh by the British : After the end of the Afghan war, Ellenborough decided to annex

N
Sindh.
l Ellenbourough’s Plan to conquer Punjab : After annexing Sindh and Kaithal in British Empire and
weakening the pwoer of Gwalior, Ellenborough made a plan to capture Punjab.

E
l Appointment of Lord Hardings As Governor General : In July, 1844 A.D., Lord Hardings was ap-
pointed Governor General of India in place of Lord Ellenborough.

L
l Military Preparations of the British : Following the policy of Ellenborough Lord Hardinge continued
military preparations ot fight against the Sikhs.

L
l The Question of Suchet Singh’s Treasure : The Dogra chief Suchet Singh was in the service of Lahore
Durbar.
l Disagreement Over the Village Mowran : Village Mowran was situated in Nabha state. This village was

A
given to Maharaja Ranji Singh by Jaswant Singh, the ruler of Nabha.
l Measures taken by Broadfoot Against the Sikhs : In November 1844 A.D. Major Broadfoot was
appointed representative of British at Ludhiana.
l Instigationof the Sikh Army by Lal Singh and Tej Singh : In September 1845 A.D., Lal Singh became
the Prime Minister of Lahore Kingdom Tej Singh was appointed the chief of the army.
l Declaration of War by Governor General : The above causes clarify that the Britishers wanted to fight
against the Sikhs. On December 13, 1845, Lord Harding declared war against the Sikhs.
n Events
l Battle of Mudki, December 18, 1845 A.D. : The British army reached Mudki, 15 kms. away from
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

Ferozeshah under the leadership of Sir Hugh Gough.


l Battle of Ferozeshah or Ferozeshahar, December 21,1845 A.D. : After the battle of Mudki on
December 20, 1845 the British army joined the army of Hugh Gough under the leadership of John Littler
from Ferozepur.
l Battle of Baddowal, January 21, 1846 A.D. : On January 21, 1846 A.D. Sardar Ranjodh Singh
Majithia and Sardar Ajit Singh of Ladwa crosses the river Satluj along with their army.
l Battle of Aliwal, January 28, 1846 A.D. : On the arrival of army assistance from ferozepur, Sir Henry
Smith Suddenly attacked the Sikh army camping at Aliwal under the leadership of Sardar Ranjodh Singh.
l Battle of Sabhraon, February 10, 1846 A.D. : The Sikh army had encamped at Sabhrason under the
leadership of Tej Singh and Lal Singh.

26
ALLEN Social Science
n Treaties of Lahore
l The First Treaty of Lahore, March 9, 1846 A.D.
l Supplementary articles of the Agreement, March 11, 1846 A.D.
n Significance of the Treaties of Lahore
Although Lord Hardinge did not annexe Punjab to the British Empire after defeating the Sikhs, yet he weak-
ened the Lahore Government. The Britishers captured the areas of Lahore. Kingdom situated in the south of
the Satlu.
n Treaty of Bhairowal, December 26, 1846 A.D.
According to the Treaty of Lahore, the British army was to stay in Lahore for one year. After the completion of
one year, Harding thought of appointing a British resident and also keeping the army in Lahore State.
n The Second Anglo-Sikh War 1848-1849 A.D.
l Dissatisfaction amongst the Sikhs after the First Anglo-Sikh War

N
} The Cow’ Row
} Retrenchment in the Sikh Army

E
} Maltreatment of Maharani Jindan
} Plan of Lord Dalhousis and Currie to annexe Punjab

L
} Exile of Bhai Maharaj Singh
} Revolt of Bhai Maharaj Singh

L
} Revolt of Sher Singh
} British Invasion of Punjab
n Events

A
l The Battle of Ramanagar, November 22, 1848 A.D.
l Battle of Chillianwala January 13, 1849 A.D.
l Occupation of Multan by the Britishers, January 22, 1849 A.D.
l Battle of Gujarat, Febuary 21, 1849
n Results
l Annexation of Punjab, March 29, 1849 A.D.
l Punishment to Mulraj and Maharaj Singh
l Disbanding of the Khalsa Army
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

l Suppression of the Sikh Nobility


l Appointment of British Officers in Punjab
l Strengthening of North-West Frontier
l Re-Organisation of Administration of Punjab
l Friendly relations of the British with the Native states of Punjab
n Annexation of the Punjab by the British
After the first Anglo-Sikh War, Lord Harding deliberately did not annex Punjab to the Briish Empire. In March
1846 A.D., with signing treaties of Lahore, Britishers snatched the fertile areas of Doab Bist, Jalandhar from
the Lahore Kingdom. The Khalsa Army was reduced. A contingent of the Brtish Army was stationed at Lahore.

27
Class X ALLEN
THE ANGLO-SIKH WARS AND ANNEXATION OF PUNJAB EXERCISE

1. Which rulers proved to be weak and feeble after 10. The British army would stay at Lahore for the
the death of Maharaja Ranjit Singh ? protection of the ____.
(1) Kharak Singh (2) Naunihal singh (1) Maharaja

(3) Rani Jindan Kaur (4) All of these (2) Maintain Peace and Order

2. Who was appointed as a governor general of India (3) Both (1) & (2)
in place of Lord Ellenborough? (4) None of these
(1) Lord Harding (2) Lord Mountbatten 11. How much was paid by Lahore Government
(3) Warren Hasting (4) Lord Canning annually to the British Government for the
expenditure of the British Army?
3. In November. 1844A.D Major Broadfoot was
(1) Rs. Twenty two Lacs
appointed representatives of British at ____.
(2) Rs. Twenty three Lacs
(1) Patiyala (2) Ludhiana

N
(3) Rs. Twenty four Lacs
(3) Sikkim (4) Kartarpur
(4) Rs. Twenty five Lacs
4. In which year, Lord Harding declare war against

E
the Sikhs? 12. _______ was appointed the First British Resident
of Punjab.
(1) December 15 , 1845
(1) Henry Lawrence (2) William

L
(2) December 14 , 1845
(3) Alexander (4) None of these
(3) December 13 , 1845
13. The Sikh Kingdom was a buffer between the _____.

L
(4) December 12 , 1845
(1) British Empire (2) Afghanistan
5. In December, 1845 A.D. approximately _____
(3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these
soliders crossed the Satluj river under the leadership

A
14. Which Treaty was very significant in the History of
of Lal Singh and Tej Singh.
Punjab and India?
(1) 50,000 (2) 60,000
(1) Treaty of Versallies (2) Treaty of Bhairowal
(3) 70,000 (4) 80,000
(3) Treaty of Ludhiana (4) Treaty of Amritsar
6. Which Battle was fought on January 28, 1846 A.D?
15. Who was defeated in the first Anglo-Sikh war fought
(1) Battle of Baddowal (1) Battle of Aliwal under the leadership of treacherous people like
(3) Battle of Mudki (4) Battle of Sabhraon Lal Singh and Tej Singh?

7. A second treaty of Lahore was signed on March (1) Sikh (2) Britishers
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History.p65"

11, 1846 A.D on the request of ______. (3) Marathas (4) All of these
(1) Lal Sigh (2) Tej Singh 16. According to the treaty of Lahore,the number of
(3) Bahadur shah (4) None of these soldiers in the Sikh army was fixed to

8. The treaty of Bhairowal was signed after the (1) 20,000 soldiers in infantry
______. (2) 12,000 Soldiers in cavalry

(1) Treaty of Versallies (2) Treaty of Lahore (3) Both (1) & (2)

(3) Treaty of Ludhiana (4) Treaty of Amritsar (4) None of these

9. The administration of the Lahore Kingdom would 17. In August ,1847 A.D., Maharani Jindan was sent
be run by a Council of Regency of ______ sardars from Lahore to ____.
till the time Maharaja Dalip Singh was a minor. (1) Shekhupura (2) Benaras
(1) Eight (2) Nine (3) Seven (4) six (3) Multan (4) Sind

28
ALLEN Social Science
18. On November 6,1848 A.D. The British army 22. Mulraj was exiled to Kala Pani on the charge of
crossed the ______ under the leadership of Lord murder of ___.
Gough.
(1) Agnew (2) Anderson
(1) River Ravi (2) River Chambal
(3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these
(3) River Betwa (4) River Damodar 23. During the Second World war, which rulers helped
19. Who was appointed as the Chief general in place Britishers ?
of General Gough? (1) Patiala (2) Jind
(1) Sir Charles Napier (2) Sir Joln Shore (3) Nabha (4) All of these

(3) Sir Villcan (4) Sir Thomos Munro 24. In Janurary,1848 A.D., _______became the
Governor General of India in place of Lord Harding.
20. The Britishers captured the entire property of
Punjab including the ______. (1) Lord Canning (2) Warren Hasting

(1) Peacock throne (2) Kohinoor Diamond (3) Lord Dalhousie (4) Mountbatten

N
(3) Gold (4) All of these 25. The Kohinoor Diamond was sent to ____of England.

(1) Queen Victoria (2) Queen Elizabeth


21. Who was sentenced to life imprisonment and sent

E
to Singapore? (3) Marie Antoine (4) All of these

(1) Maharaja Singh (2) Tej Singh

L
(3) Chattar Singh (4) None of these

A L
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History.p65"

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 4 1 2 3 2 2 1 2 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 1 1 1 2
Que. 21 22 23 24 25
Ans. 1 3 4 3 1

29
Class X ALLEN
9. PUNJAB’S CONTRIBUTION TOWARDS
STRUGGLE FOR FREEDOM
n Contribution of Punjab in the First Battle of Independence in 1857 A.D.
l Revolt of Soldiers : On May 10, 1857 A.D. the first battle of independence of India started at Meerut. On
May 12, 1857 A.D., when the news of the battle reached Lahore then due to fear of revolt in Punjab the
Indian and Punjab soldiers of Mian Mir cantonment were disarmed.
Even then the Punjab and Indian soldiers revolted in the eastern regions of Punjab in Jalandhar, Phillaur,
Jhelum, Sialkot and Thaneshar, the army rebelled.
l Revolot of the People : At some places people also revolted watching the delicate situation of the Britishers.
l Revolt of Sardar Ahmed Khan Kharal : Ahmed Khan Kharal, the Chief of Kharal tribe revolted on non-
payment of land revenue to British of Kharal tribe revolted on non-payment of land revenue to British
government. The revolt of 1857 A.D. could not be successful in Punjab because the rebels of Punjab
because the rebels of Punjab did not have an able leader.

N
n Namdhari or Kuka Movement
The Namdhari or Kuka Movement after Satguru Balak Singh Ji was doing great work under the leadership of

E
Satguru Ram Singh Ji. On April 12, 1857 A.D. (On the day of Baisakhi), of Satguru Ram Singh Ji laid the
foundation of a new movement called Namdhari or Kuka Movement by offering Amrit to the people.

L
Guruji preached against female infanticide, selling and exchange of girl child in marriage and sati system. He
started a new custom of inter caste marriage without dowry by spending rupees 1.25 called Anand Karaj.

L
Shri Satguru Ram Singh Ji has divided Punjab in 22 Subas to facilitate propagation of his preachings. Every
suba had a Chief and he was called a Suba.
Many Namdhari Kukas were sent to Kala Pani. Many Kukas were killed by drowing them in the ocean. The

A
properties of many Kukas were confiscated. The British government inflicted atrocities on the Kuka but the
movement continued till India achieved Independence on August 15, 1947.
n The Arya Samaj
Swami Dayanand Saraswati (1824-1883 A.D.) was the founder of the Arya Samaj. He established the Arya
Samaj in 1875 A.D. He opened an important branch of the Arya Samaj at Lahore in 1877 A.D. Swami
Dayanand Saraswati not only resisted the Britishers by the spread of education but also infused the spirit of
nationalism amongst the Punjabis. Swami Dayanand Saraswati taught Indians to be proud of their country and
civilization. In 1892 A.D. the Arya Samaj was divided into College party and Gurukul Party.
n Rise of Peasant Movement
The revenue policy of the British government was very harsh. At the time of famine or drought, no relazation
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

was given for the payment of land revenue. The peasants either has to mortgage their land or sell their animals
to pay the revenue. In 1875-78 A.D., the total land mortaged by peasants was 1,65,000 acres in Punjab. In
1884-85 A.D. this area increased to 3,85,000 acres. It resulted in the peasant movement in Punjab. The
leaders like Sardar Ajit Singh, Lala Lajpat Rai, Sufi Amba Parsad and Sayyid Haider Ali led the movement. The
enhancement of canal water revenue was largely opposed in canal colonies in 1905-07 A.D. The song ‘Pagri
Sambhal Jatta’ composed by Banke Dyal echoed in every home.
n The Ghadar Movement
In 1905 A.D., many punjabis due to economic crisis had to migrate to Fiji, Ghana, Malaya, Canada and
America to earn their livelihood. These Punjabis made efforts for the freedom of India while living in foreign
lands. The Ghadar Movement was one of the important efforts. American continent was the centre for such
movements.
30
ALLEN Social Science
The main objective of newspaper ‘Ghadar’ was to liberate India through an armed revolt.
(1) To spread a sense of revolt in the Army.
(2) To murder the touts of the Britishers.
(3) To break jails.
(4) To plunder government treasury and police stations.
(5) To publish and distribute revolutionary literature.
(6) To help the enemies of the Britishers.
(7) To accumulate arms.
(8) To manufacture bombs.
Ras Behari Bose led the Ghadar Party and foreign returned revolutionaries. Kartar Singh Sarabha on returning
from America established links with Bhai Parmanand Ji and also established links with Ras Behari Bose after
locating the address of his secret hideout in Benaras. Kartar Singh Sarabha and Bhai Nidhan Singh Chugh
worked with students of Islamia High School, Ludhiana. Sarabha wanted to start a press to publish Ghadar

N
along with Lala Ram Saran Dass Kapurthala, but could not succeed. Even then he got the newspaper cyclostyled
from Ludhiana and Lahore and published ti as ‘Ghadar Goonj’.
n Kamagata Maru Incident

E
On January 24, 1913 A.D. the High Court of Canada cancelled the law of restrictions imposed on Indians. On
reading this news many people of Punjab reached ports of Calcutta, Singapore and Hong Kong to go to

L
Canada. But no Shipping Company was ready to take the responsibility to drop Punjabis at Canada out of fear
of the Canadian attitude.
Bada Gurdit Singh of village Sarhali, district Amritsar was a contractor at Singapore and Malaya. In 1913 A.D.,

L
he started Guru Nanak Navigations Company. In March 24, 1914 A.D. the company rented out a ship,
Kamagata Maru from Japan. It was named Guru Nanak Ship.
Baba Gurdit Singh escaped and reached Punjab. On the birth day of Guru Nanak Dev Ji in 1920 A.D., he

A
surrendered before the police at Nankana Sahib. He was imprisoned for give years. After getting released from
the prison, he started living in Calcutta (Kolkata). He died on July 24, 1954 A.D.
Around 25,000 people of Amritsar and from the neighbouring villages gathered for a meeting on April 13,
1919 A.D. the day of Baisakhi in Jallianwala Bagh. General Dyer declared such meeting unlawaful, but people
did not know about the declaration. General Dyer got the opportunity to take revenge of the killings of the
Britishers. He reached the front of the door of Jallianwala Bagh along with 150 soldiers. There was only one
narrow way for entering and going out of the Bagh. Standing on the gate of the Bagh, General Dyer ordered
the people to disperse in three minutes, which was impossible. After three minutes, General Dyer ordered firing
in which about 1000 people were killed and more than 3000 injured.
The Jallianwala Bagh massacre gave a new direction to the freedom movement of the country. Sardar Udham
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

Singh took revenge of this massacre after 21 years by killing Sir Michael O’Dyer in England (the Lt.
Governor of Punjab at the time of Jallianwala Bagh massacre).
n Akali Movement (Gurudwara Reform Movement)
The main cause of the emergence of the Akali Movement in Punjab was the presence of true and sacrificing
Granthis like Bhai Mani in Gurudwars in earlier times. But till 1920 A.D. the Gurudwaras fo Punjab came under
the control of licentious Mahantas. Sikhs were fed up with the immoral activities of Mahatas and wanted to
reform the Gurudwaras. To solve this problem they wanted to take the helo of the British Government but were
unsuccessful. In November 1920 A.D. the Sikhs passed a resolution to form a committee of Sikh representa-
tives to look after the Guruwaras. With the efforts of the Sikhs on November 16, 1920 A.D., Shiromani
Gurudwara Parbandhak Committee (SGPC), and on December 14, 1920 A.D., Shiromani Akali Dal were
constituted.

31
Class X ALLEN
n The Babbar Akali Movement
The Babbar Akali Movement originated to resist the Mahants of Gurudwaras and the police. The Babbar Akalis
formed first Jatha of ‘Chakarwarti’ to resist the Government and its touts. The Jatha also came to be known as
‘Babbar Akali Jatha’ after the publication of the newspaper ‘Babbar Akali’ by them. The Jatha was established
in August 1922.

n Resolution of complete Independence


The Congress decided to declare their political objective of ‘Puruna Swaraj’ instead of ‘Dominion Status’ in the
Calcutta Session. According to this decision, a session of Congress was held in Lahore on December 31, 1929,
Pandit Jawaharal Nehru was the President of this historical session. A resolution for complete independence was
passed on that day at mid night on the banks of the river Ravi. Nehru hoisted the National Flag amidst slogans
of ‘Inquilab Zindabad’. Later the patriots present in session read the resolution. After a few days, the Congress
Working Committee released an order that on January 26, 1930 A.D., Independence Day would be celebrated
in India.
n Praja Mandal Movement

N
The State of Patiala was backward in the field of education and industry. It was also not politically awakened.
During 1928-38 A.D., the middle class peasants were only politically awakened. Sewa Singh ThikariWala

E
founded Patiala Riyasti Dal. He was arrested on July 9, 1923. At the time of Jaito Morcha, Maharaja of Patiala
Bhupendra Singh tried to win thikariwala in his favour but he did not agree at any cost. Therefore, Maharaja
Patiala sent him to Lahore jail. He was elected Jathedar of the Patiala Riyasti Akali Dal and head of Malwa

L
Pratinidhi Khalsa Diwan even in his absence.

A L CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History

32
ALLEN Social Science
PUNJAB’S CONTRIBUTION TOWARDS STRUGGLE
FOR FREEDOM EXERCISE
1. Which army was disbanded by the British 10. In which year the Arya Samaj was founded?
Government? (1) 1875 (2) 1861 (3) 1774 (4) 1880
(1) Khalsa (2) Sikh 11. Dayanand Saraswati established Arya Samajin 1875
(3) Punjab (4) Marathas at
2. On May 10,1857 A.D. the first battle of (1) Lahore (2) Nagpur
independence of India started at ____. (3) Ahmadnagar (4) Bombay
(1) Amritsar (2) Hoshiarpur 12. Which patriots have the contribution of the Arya
(3) Meerut (4) Derajat Samaj ?
3. At Montgomery, _____ etc. the Muslim tribes also (1) Lala Lajpat Rai (2) Sardar Ajit Singh
revolted against the British.
(3) Shradhananda (4) All of these

N
(1) Multan (2) Bahawalpur
13. Which taxes were introduced by the government?
(3) Fazilka (4) All of these
(1) Land revenue (2) Irrigation tax
4. Which revolt could not be successful in Punjab

E
(3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these
because the rebels of Punjab did not have an able
leader? 14. Which leaders led the peasant movement?

L
(1) Revolt of 1857 (2) Revolt of 1847 (1) Sardar Ajit Singh (2) Lala Lajpat rai

(3) Revolt of 1837 (4) Revolt of 1827 (3) Sufi Amba Parsad (4) All of these
15. In 1905 A.D., many Punjabis due to economic crisis

L
5. Which movement is also called the Namdhari
Movement ? had to migrate to
(1) Santhal (2) Mundas (1) Fiji (2) Ghana
(3) Malaya (4) All of these

A
(3) Kuka (4) None of these
6. Guruji preached against 16. The Ghadar Party came into existence in 1913
(1) Female infanticide (2) Child in marriage A.D. in ______.

(3) sati system (4) All of these (1) San Francisco (2) Canada
7. Who was the founder of Arya Samaj? (3) Indonesia (4) Ghana
(1) Raja Ram Mohan Roy 17. Who led the Ghadar party?
(2) Dayanand Saraswathi (1) Ras Behari Bose (2) Lala Hardayal
(3) Annie Besant (3) Kanshi Ram (4) Baba Sohan Singh
(4) Vivekananda
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History.p65"

18. How many Revolutionaries were awarded life


8. Swami Dayanand Saraswati opened an important imprisonment in Ghadar Movement?
branch of the Arya Samaj 1877 in (1) One hundred and ninety four
(1) Surat (2) Lahore (2) Two hundred and ninety four
(3) Ambala (4) Bombay (3) Three hundred and ninety four
9. Which of the following statements regarding the
(4) None of these
principles and programmes of Arya Samaj is not
19. The Khilafat movement was started by
correct ?
(1) Ali Brothers
(1) Negated all the escapist and fatalist philosophy
(2) Opposed widow remarriage (2) Subhash Chandra Bose
(3) Opposed idol worship (3) Mohammed Ali jinnah
(4) Encouraged inter-caste marriages (4) Sardar Vallabhai Pate

33
Class X ALLEN
20. Khilafat movement was started against the 23. In 1943, Subhash Chandra Bose gathered Indians
(1) British government (2) Hindus at Singapore and established____.

(3) Muslims (4) Christians (1) Indian National Army


(2) Indian Natural Army
21. What led to the suspension of the Non Co-operation
Movement ? (3) Indian National Armed

(1) Wagon tragedy (4) None of these

(2) Amritsar Tragedy 24. The Punjabi Patriots raised slogans

(3) Chauri Chaura Incident (1) Simon Commission go back


(2) Vande Matram
(4) Malabar Rebellion of 1921
(3) Both (1) & (2)
22. Neta Ji Subhash Chandra bose passed the ICS
examination in (4) None of these

(1) 1920 (2) 1930 25. On January 24,1913 A.D. the _____ of Canada
cancelled the law of restrictions imposed on Indians.
(3) 1940 (4) 1950

N
(1) High Court (2) Supreme Court
(3) District Court (4) Lok Adalats

L E
A L CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\01_History.p65"

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 1 3 4 1 3 1 2 2 2 1 3 4 3 4 4 1 2 1 1 1
Que. 21 22 23 24 25
Ans. 3 1 1 4 1

34
ALLEN Social Science
10. FEATURES OF INDIAN CONSTITUTION

n Constitution: It's Meaning


The Constitution is a fundamental legal written document according to which the government of a country functions.
Every law enacted by the Parliament has to be in conformity with the Constitution. The country should be governed
as per the provinces of the Constitution only.
n Importance of Constitution
l In a democratic country like India, the importance of the Constitution is more significant.
l In a democratic government, the citizens participate in the functioning of the government, directly or indirectly.
l It is a government in which the government's powers are clearly spelt out and citizens' right are mentioned
clearly.
n Framing of Constitution

N
After the end of the World War II, in 1945, the British government sent three cabinet ministers to find a solution
to the question of India's Independence. This team of ministers was called Cabinet Mission. The constitution
assembly was constituted and the structure of the constitution was decided as per the procedure suggested

E
by the Cabinet Mission. This way the constitution was formed
l The assembly started its functioning from December 9, 1946.

L
l There were 389 members of which 296 members belonged to the British Provinces and 93 belonged to
Princely States.

L
l The Constituent Assembly had members belonging to different communities and regions of India.
l The Constituent Assembly met for 166 days spread over a period of 2 years,11 months and 18 days.
l It also had members representing different political parties. There were around 30 member from scheduled

A
castes as well
l Frank Anthony represented Anglo-Indians while H.P Modi represented Parsis.
l Sarojini Naidu and Vijayalakshmi Pandit were important women members.Dr. Rajendra Prasad was elected
President of the Constituent Assembly. A Drafting Committee was appointed to draft the Constitution under
the Chairmanship of Dr. Bhimrao Ambedkar.
n Main Aspects of the Constitution
l The Preamble: Indian Constitution begins with the Preamble. It is not enforceable by the court of law.
The Preamble provides the key to understand the Constitution. In 1976, The words 'socialist', 'Secular'.
'Unity' and integrity of the Nation' were added in preamble.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

l Detailed and Elaborate: The Constitution provides the governmental structure at the centre, state, and
local levels, rights and duties of the citizen, directive principles of the state policy, union-state relations.
Elections and emergency provisions.
l Procedure of Amendments: Keeping these changes with time in view, a system has been provided where
the constitution can be amended when required. Amendment can be made by a simple majority of members
present and voting in the parliament.
n Other Salient Features of the constitution
l People are Sovereign : In India, all powers of the State rest in hands of the people. People have given
these powers to the State. The Constitution is framed by the Constituent Assembly that has been indirectly
elected by people.

35
Class X ALLEN
l India : A Democracy : India is a democracy. People of India elect their governments at all the three levels
- central, State, and local. Every citizen of India, who is 18 years of age and above and who is not otherwise
disqualified by law, is entitled to vote in the elections.
l India : A Sovereign, Socialist and Secular Republic : All citizens, irrespective of their religious belief, are
equal in the eye of law. The government cannot formulate such policies, which discriminate among various
religious communities that live in India.
l India : India is a republic. It means that the people indirectly elect the head of the State, i.e., the President.
The position of President is not a hereditary one.

n Main Features of the Constitution


l India : India is a Union of States. There is nowhere any reference to the word 'Federal' in the Constitution.
It has some elements of Federal government.
l Union list: Subjects of national importance like defence, foreign affairs, atomic energy, banking, railway
communication, post, and telegraph, are included in the Union list. The Central Government can pass laws

N
on the subjects mentioned in the Union list. The Union list has 97 subjects.
l State list: The State list comprises of those important subjects on which the state governments can pass
laws. Subjects like police. local government, trade and commerce within the state, agriculture. It has 66

E
subject.

l Concurrent list: There are subjects that are of common concern both to the Centre and the state

L
governments. Ordinarily. Both theCentral and the State governments can pass laws on these subjects. This
list includes subjects like criminal and civil procedure, marriage and divorce, education. Economic planning,

L
trade union. It has 47 subjects, which are of more national importance.

l Emergency Provisions : There are some provisions in the Constitution known as emergency provisions.

(1) At the time of war. external attack, or armed rebellion,

A
(2) Constitutional breakdown occurs when law and order breaks down in some state

(3) Financial emergency.

l Parliamentary System: India has a parliamentary system of government. In a parliamentary system, the
Parliament is supreme authority representing people.

The Parliament is bicameral. Means it has two houses : Upper House and Lower House. Upper House
is called Rajya Sabha and Lower House is called Lok Sabha.
l Independent and Impartial Judiciary : The Constitution has provided for the establishment of an
independent and impartial judiciary. In the case of a conflict between the central government and the state
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

government, the Judiciary plays the role of an umpire.


l Adult Franchise : Any citizen who is above 18 years of age and above can vote without any discrimination.

l Secularism : Followers of every religion are free to follow and practice their own religion.

36
ALLEN Social Science
FEATURES OF INDIAN CONSTITUTION EXERCISE
1. How many members of the scheduled castes were 10. On whose recommendation was the Constituent
there in the constituent assembly of India? Assembly formed?
(1) 21 (2) 45 (3) 35 (4) 30 (1) Cabinet Mission Plan
2. In which subjects those powers are included which (2) Govt. of India Act, 1935
are added to the constitution later on?
(3) Mountbatten Plan
(1) Residuary power (2) Central powers
(4) Cripp's Mission
(3) State powers (4) Concurrent powers
11. Which of the following Acts gave representation to
3. The design of the National Flag was adopted by the Indians for the first time in legislation?
the constituent assembly of India in
(1) Indian Councils Act, 1919
(1) July, 1947 (2) August, 1947
(2) Govt. of India Act, 1935
(3) July, 1948 (4) July, 1950
(3) Indian Councils Act, 1909

N
4. The constitution of India was enacted by a
(4) Govt. of India Act, 1939
Constituent Assembly set up
12. Which of the following was adopted from the Maurya
(1) through a resolution of the provisional

E
dynasty in the emblem of Government of India?
government
(1) Horse
(2) by the Indian National Congress

L
(2) Words Satyameva Jayate
(3) under the Independence Act, 1947
(4) under the Cabinet Mission Plan, 1946 (3) Four lions

L
5. Who among the following was the Chairman of the (4) Chariot Wheel
Drafting Committee of the Indian Constitution 13. Who presided over the inaugural meeting of the
(1) Rajendra Prasad (2) C. Rajagopalachari Constituent Assembly of India?

A
(3) Tej Bahadur Sapru (4) B.R. Ambedkar (1) Sachchidananda Sinha

6. The constituent Assembly which framed the (2) P. Upendra


Constitution for Independent India set up in (3) B.R. Ambedkar
(1) 1947 (2) 1949 (3) 1945 (4) 1946 (4) Dr. Rajendra Prasad
7. There is no reference of the word _____ in the 14. The Constitution of India was promulgated on
Constitution. January 26, 1930 because
(1) Secular (2) Democratic (1) It was an auspicious day
(3) Federal (4) Socialist (2) Th is day was b eing celebra ted as t he
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

8. Who among the following was not a member of the Independence Day since 1929
Constituent Assembly established in July 1946? (3) It was the wish of the farmers of the Constitution
(1) K.M. Munshi (2) J.B.Kripalani (4) The British did not want to leave India earlier
(3) Mahatma Gandhi (4) Vallabhbhai Patel than this date
9. What is the special Constituent position of Jammu 15. The first session of the Constituent Assembly was
and Kashmir? held in _______.
(1) Indian laws are not applicable (1) Bombay
(2) It is above Indian Constitution (2) Lahore
(3) It is not the integral parts of Indian Union (3) Calcutta
(4) It has its own Constitution (4) New Delhi

37
Class X ALLEN
16. The members of the Constituent Assembly were 25. In which year was the first Amendment made in the
_________ preamble to the constitution

(1) Elected by Provincial Assemblies (1) 1972 (2) 1991


(3) 1978 (4) 1976
(2) Only representatives of the princely states
26. The Constituent Assembly met within a span of ____
(3) Elected directly by people
years, _____ months and ____ days.
(4) Nominated by the government.
(1) 1, 11, 18 (2) 3, 12, 18
17. The Indian Constitution was enforced on _________. (3) 2, 11, 19 (4) 2, 11, 18
(1) 15th Aug, 1947 (2) 26th Nov, 1949 27. Who were the women members of Constituent
(3) 26th Jan, 1950 (4) 30th Jan, 1950 Assembly?
(1) Indira Gandhi and Madam Cama
18. The Constitution of India was adopted by the
__________ (2) Sarojini Naidu and Vijaylakshmi Pandit
(3) Durga Devi and Rani Lakshmibai
(1) Parliament of India (2) Constituent Assembly

N
(4) Annie Besant and Madam Cama
(3) Governor General (4) British Parliament
28. The Indian constitution begin with ________
19. How long did the Constituent Assembly take to finally

E
(1) Prayer (2) National Anthem
pass the Constitution?
(3) Indian pledge (4) Preamble
(1) About 6 months in 1949
29. Generally an amendment can be made in the

L
(2) About2 years since Aug 15, 1947 Constitution by a _____ majority of the members
(3) Exactly a year since Nov 26, 1948 present and voting during specific amendments.

L
(4) About 3 years since Dec 9, 1946 (1) 1/3rd (2) 1/4th
(3) 1/2nd (4) 2/3rd
20. Who was the Chairman of the Constituent Assembly?
30. At the time of emergency,India adopts a ___ type

A
(1) Dr. Rajendra Prasad (2) C. Rajagopalachari
of administrative system.
(3) Pt. Jawaharlal Nehru (4) Dr. B.R. Ambadkar (1) Democratic System (2) Residuary System
21. Who was the President of constituent assembly ? (3) Unitary System (4) Secular System
(1) H. P. Modi (2) Frank Anthony 31. Which of the following is correct regarding the Indian
Constitution?
(3) Gandhiji (4) Rajendra Prasad
(1) It is completely based on British Constitution.
22. The Constituent Assembly met for __________.
(2) It is original
(1) 145 days (2) 200 days
(3) It is made only on the basis of Government of
(3) 165 days (4) 166 days India Act, 1935
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

23. The Constitution names our country as (4) It is a mixture of several Constitutions.

(1) Bharat (2) Aryavarta 32. How many members of the constituent Assembly
belonged to the Princely states?
(3) Hindustan (4) India
(1) 93 (2) 63 (3) 296 (4) 389
24. A constitution is
33. In the Constituent Assembly __________ members
(1) A set of ordinary laws belonged to the British Provinces
(2) A set of financial laws (1) 389 (2) 296 (3) 93 (4) 30
(3) A set of official laws 34. Who was parsi member of Constituent Assembly?

(4) The basic structure defining the powers of the (1) Sardar Patel (2) H. P. Modi
state and the rights and duties of the citizens. (3) K. M. Munshi (4) Narendra Modi

38
ALLEN Social Science
35. The Constituent Assembly for undivided India first 41. Match the following.
met on
Column-I Column-II
(1) 6th December, 1946 (2) 3rd June, 1947 (a) 97 Subjects (1) State List
(b) 66 Subjects (2) Union List
(3) 20th February, 1947 (4) 9th December, 1946
(c) 47 Subjects (3) Concurrent List
36. The constituent Assembly consisted of _______ (d) 395 (4) Number of articles in
members. our Constitution

(1) 296 (2) 63 (3) 389 (4) 93 (1) (a-1) (b-2) (c-3) (d-4)

37. Which of the following words was not added in the (2) (a-2) (b-1) (c-3) (d-4)
Preamble of our Constitution in 1976? (3) (a-4) (b-1) (c-2) (d-3)
(1) Unity (2) Secular (4) (a-3) (b-1) (c-2) (d-4)

(3) Unity in diversity (4) Socialist 42. When did India first celebrate Independence Day?

38. When the Constituent Assembly for the dominion (1) 26th Nov,1949 (2) 26th Jan, 1950

N
of India reassembled on 31st October, 1947, its (3) 26thDec, 1946 (4) 26th Jan, 1930
reduced membership was 43. A historical resolution to achieve complete
(1) 331 (2) 299 Independence was passed in _________session of

E
Congress.
(3) 311 (4) 319
(1) Karachi (2) Lahore
39. From which of the following country's Constitution

L
did India incorporate few points in its own (3) Punjab (4) Kolkata
Constitution ? 44. When did the British government send the Cabinet

L
Mission to find out the solution to the question of
(1) Australian (2) French
India's Independence?
(3) German (4) Chinese
(1) 1940 (2) 1929

A
40. Who represented Anglo Indian Community in the
(3) 1945 (4) 1930
Constituent Assembly?
45. A formal legal written document according to which
(1) H.P.Modi
the government of a country function is called
(2) Shyam Prasad Mukherji ____________.

(3) Tom Blair (1) Supreme Court (2) Preamble

(4) Frank Anthony (3) Constitution (4) Constituent Assembly


CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 4 1 1 4 4 4 3 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 2 2 4 4
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 4 4 3 4 1 2 2 4 3 3 2 2 4
Que. 41 42 43 44 45
Ans. 2 4 2 3 3

39
Class X ALLEN
11. THE CENTRAL AND STATE GOVERNMENTS
n Lok Sabha
It is known as the house of the people. The members of the Lok sabha are directly elected by the people of
India.
l Term : 5 years, however can be dissolved earlier by the President on the advice of the Prime Minister.
l Composition : Maximum strength : 552, Out of this-
} Not more than 530 members shall represent the States
} Not more than 20 members shall represent Union Territories
} Two members of the Anglo Indian community must be represented by the President to the Lok Sabha.
l Qualification of Membership : Conditions needed for a person to be a member of Lok sabha are -
} He should be an Indian citizen.
} Should be atleast 25 years of age
} Should have his name in the electoral rolls in some part of the country.

N
} Should not be an insolvent i.e he should not be in debt and should have the ability to meet his financial
commitments.

E
l Disqualification of membership : A person can be disqualified for being chosen as and for being a
member of either House of Parliament-
} If he holds any other office of Profit ubder the government of India or the Government of any State, but

L
not a minister for the Union or for the State.
} If he is an undischarged solvent,

L
} If he is not a citizen of India or has voluntarily acquired citizenship of foreign state or is under an
acknowledgement of allegiance or adherence to a foreign power.
n Parliamentary procedures

A
Some formalities which the legislators have to observe in the Parliament as well as in the State Legislatures are
called Parliamentary Procedures.
l Sessions : Each House of the Parliament is smmoned by the President. Each House shall meet twice a year
and the interval between two consecutive sessions shall be less than 6 months. There are normally three
sessions in a year-
} The Budget Session (February-May)
} The Monsoon Session (July-August)
} The Winter Session (November-December)
l Quorum : The Quorum means the minimum number of members required to be present in order to enable
the House to transact its business.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

l Question hour : The right of the members to ask questions from the government is known as interpellation.
A member has to give ten days’s notice for a question. The first hour on every working day of the House is
reserved for questions unless otherwise decided by the Speaker. This hour is known as the Question Hour.
l There are three types of questions :
} Starred Questions : Those to which a member wishes to have an oral answer on the floor of the House.
These questions are marked with an asterik mark.
} Unstarred questions : Questions to which answers are given in written form.
} Short notice questions : Questions related to urgent importance. Such questions are asked with a notice
shorter than that of 10 days.
l Zero hour : Refers to the period which begins at 12 o’clock after the question hour and continues till the
lunch break which begins at 1 o’clock.

40
ALLEN Social Science
l Types of motions
A Motion is a formal proposal made by a member stating that the House should take up some particular
matter which is of public importance.
} Adjournment Motion : It means a proposal to lay aside all other business and take up a definite matter
of urgent importance.
} No Confidence Motion : It is a proposal expressing lack of confidence in the Ministry.No Confidence in
the Government is moved by the opposition. The House grants leave to move No Confidence Motion only
when it has the support of at least 50 members.
n Speaker of the Lok Sabha
The Speaker is the presiding officer of the Lok Sabha. He occupies the position of a great authority and
responsibility.
l Election
The Speaker is elected from among its own members soon after the newly elected House meets for the first
time.
l Deputy Speaker

N
When the Speaker is absent his duties are performed by the Deputy Speaker. Deputy Speaker is elected or
is removed from office in the same way as the Speaker.
l Functions of a Speaker

E
} Speaker presides all the meetings of the House. He allots time for discussions.
} The Speaker interprets the rules and regulations of the procedures of the House.
} All Bills passed by the House are signed by the Speaker before they are sent to Rajya Sabha.

L
} The Speaker decides the admissibility of all questions and resolutions
} Speaker puts issues to vote but does not vote in the House except when there are equal votes on both the

L
sides.
} He decides whether a Bill is Money Bill or not.
n Rajya Sabha

A
The upper House or the Council of states is known as the 'Rajya Sabha'. It represents the federation of States of
the Indian Union.
l Composition : The maximum strength of the Rajya Sabha can be 250 members. The members fall into
two categories - nominated and elected.
l Nominated Members : They are nominated by the President from among persons having special knowl-
edge or practical experience in matter such as : literature, science, art and social service. The nominated
members are 12 in number.
l Elected Members : 238 members are elected by the States in the Union. The allocation of seats among the
Sates in the Union. The allocation of seats among the states is not equal, as this would be undemocratic.
Seats are allocated to the States and the union Territories on the basis of their population.
l Election : The representatives of each State in the Rajya Sabha are elected by the elected members of the
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

Legislative Assembly of each State in accordance with the system of proportional representation by means
of a single transferable vote.
l Term : The Rajya Sabha is a Permanent House. It cannot be dissolved like the Lok Sabha. Each member of
the Rajya Sabha is elected for a period of six years. One-third of the total members of the House retire after
every two years.
l Qualifications for membership : The minimum age for contesting election for the Rajya Sabha is 30
years. The qualifications for membership of Rajya Sabha are given below :
} He should be an Indian citizen.
} He should be at least 30 years of age.
} He should have his name in the electoral rolls in some part of the country.
} He should not be an insolvent, i.e., he should not be in debt and should have the ability to meet his
financial commitments.
41
Class X ALLEN
l Disqualification of membership : Same conditions as for Lok Sabha.
Presiding officers
} The Vice-President of India is the ex-officio Chairman of the Rajya Sabha. He presides over its meetings.
He cannot vote on any issue discussed in the house as he is not its member.
n Powers and functions of the Rajya Sabha and the Lok Sabha
The parliament of India comprises the President, the Lok Sabha and the Rajya Sabha.
Rajya Sabha has equal powers with Lok Sabha in important matters like the impeachment of the President,
removal of the Vice-President, Constitutional amendments and removal of the Judges of the Supreme Court
and the High Courts.
l Legislative Powers
All Bills, other than the Money Bills, can originate in any House of the Parliament. No bill can become a law
unless agreed to by both the Houses.
The Parliament is competent to make laws on :
} Matters in the Union list : The Parliament has exclusive powers to make laws on all the 97 subjects

N
mentioned in the Union List, including important subjects like Defence, Communications, Foreign Policy,
etc.
} Matters in the Concurrent List : Along with the State Legislative Assemblies, the Parliament can make

E
laws on the 47 subjects listed in the Concurrent List.
l Residuary Powers : The parliament possesses residuary powers. It means that it can make laws with respect

L
to all those matters which are not mentioned in any of the three lists - the Union List, the State List and the
Concurrent List.

L
} Matters in the state list :
(i) During the proclamation of an Emergency.
(ii) When the Rajya Sabha passes a resolution by a two-thirds majority that a subject in the State List has

A
assumed national importance.
(iii) When two or more States are of the opinion that the Parliament should legislate on a subject given in
the State List, the Parliament may make an Act on that subject but that would be aplicable only to the
consenting States.
} Ordinances : The President is empowered to promulgate an ordinance at a time when the Parliament
is not in session. It has the same effect as an Act.
} Powers during Emergency : When there is a total breakdown of the Constitutional machinery in a
State, a state of Emergency is declared in the state.
l Financial Powers
A money Bill can originate in the Lok Sabha only. After a Money Bill is passed by the Lok Sabha, it is sent
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

to the Rajya Sabha for its recommendations, which it must make within 14 days.
} The Budget : The Parliament passes the Union Budget containing the estimates of receipts and
expenditure of the Government for a financial year. The Budget is presented in two parts, namely, the
Railway Budget and the general Budget.
} Supplementary Grants : If the amount authorised for the current financial year is not sufficient, the
Government may make a fresh demand known as the 'Supplementary Grant'.
} Vote on Account : If the Union Budget is not passed before the beginning of the new financial year, i.e.,
April 1, there would be no money for the Executive to spend.
} Salaries : The salaries and allowances of MPs and Ministers are determined by Parliament.
} Permission for Taxes : No tax can be imposed or money spent by the government without the approval
of the Parliament.

42
ALLEN Social Science
} Control over the Executive
The Council of Ministers is collectively responsible to the Lok Sabha. The ministers remain in office to as
long as they enjoy the confidence of a majority of members in the Lok Sabha.
} Vote of No-confidence : If a Government acts against the constitutional provisions, it can be voted our
of office by passing a vote of no-confidence against the Prime Minister, or the Minister as a whole or any
of its memers. In such a case, the whole Ministry has to resign.
} Monetary Controls : During the budget session a cut motion may be moved. Parliamentary committee
on Public Accounts ensures that public money is spent in accordance with Parliament's decision. It examines
reports of the Comptroller and Auditor-General of India.
l Judicial Powers
} Impeachment of the President : The Parliament has the right to remove the President from office
through a procedure known as 'impeachment'. In case of violation of the Constitution or grave misconduct,
either House may frame charges against the President. If a resolution to thus effect is passed by a two-
third majority of total membership of the House and by the majority of members present and voting, the
other House investigates the charges.

N
} Removal of Judges, etc : The Parliament can remove the Judges of the Supreme Court and the High
Courts, the Chief Election Commissioner and the Comptroller and Auditor General of India, if they are
found guilty of violating provisions of the Constitution.

E
} Punishment : The Parliament can punish a person for obstructing the work of Parliament or showing
disrespect to the House.

L
l Electoral Functions
The Indian Parliament has to perform certain electoral duties as well, such as

L
} The Parliament of India along with the State Legislatures elects the President of India.
} The Vice President of India is elected by both the Houses of the Parliament.
} The Lok Sabha elects its own Speaker and Deputy Speaker from amongst its own members while the Rajya
Sabha elects its Deputy Chairman.

A
l Amendment of the Constitution
Both Houses of Parliament can amend the Constitution. The amendment must be passed by each House by
a majority of total membership and by a two-third majority of members present and voting. Otherwise the
amendment bill cannot be passed. In some cases the amendment requires the ratification or approval of half
of the Legislative Assemblies of States.
l Difference over the Legislative Matters
Legislative functions belong to two categories—
(a) Ordinary Bills (b) Money Bills.
} Ordinary Bills : An inordinary Bill may originate in either House. If there is disagreement between the
two Houses, the bill is referred to a joint- sitting of both the Houses.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

} Money Bills: In case of Money Bills, the reject a Money Bill the Rajya Sabha has virtually no powers. It
can not reject a Money Bill nor amend it by virtue of its own powers. It must, within the stipulated period
of 14 days, return the Bill to the Lok Sabha, which may thereupon either accept or reject all or any of the
recommendations of the Rajya Sabha.
l Impeachment
In matters of impeachment of the President of India or the Chief Justice or a Judge of the Supreme Court or
of a High Court, both Houses have absolutely equal powers. Impeachment can be initiated in either House
and the other House has an equal say in the judgement.
l Emergency Provision
In case of proclamation of a National Emergency and if the Lok Sabha is dissolved, it is the Rajya Sabha
which shoulders all the responsibilities of the Union Legislature.
43
Class X ALLEN
n The President
The executive power of the Indian Union is vested in the President. The President is the Head of the State and
the supreme commander of the Defence Forces of India.
The President exercises his powers on the advice of the Prime Minister and the Council of Ministers. The
Constitution provides that ‘there shall be a Council of Ministers with the Prime Minister at the head, to aid and
advise the President, in the exercise of his/her functions’.
l Qualifications for Election
} A person shall be eligible for election as President, if he –
(a) is a citizen of India;
(b) has completed the age of thirty-five years; and
(c) is qualified for election as a member of the Lok Sabha.
} A person shall not be eligible for election as President if he holds any office of profit under the Government
of India or Government of any State or under any local or other authority subject to the control of any of
the said Governments.

N
l Composition of the Electoral College
The President is elected indirectly by the members of an Electorl College consisting of :

E
} the elected members of both Houses of Parliament;
} the elected members of the Legislative Assemblies of the States including Natonal Capital Territory of
Dehli and the Union Territory of Puducherry.

L
} Voting formula for Presidential Election

Total Population of State

L
} No. of Elected Members of Vidhan Sabha × 1000

} Each elected member of Parliament has such number of votes as obtained by dividing the total number of

A
votes assigned to MLAs of the States by the total number of Elected Members of Parliament.

Total number of Votes


assigned to MLAs of all States
Thus, Value of the Vote of an MP =
Total number of elected MPs

} Single Transferable Vote System


Under the single transferable vote system, the voter marks as many preferences (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6....) on
the ballot paper as there are condidates. Once the votes are cast, the first preference votes are counted.
If any condidate gets an absolute majority or more than 50% of the votes he is declared elected. If no
condidate is able to get an absolute majority in the first preference votes, then the condidate who has
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

secured the least votes is eliminated and his second preference votes, are taken into consideration. This
process of elimination continues until a condidate gets an absolute majority and he is declared elected.
l Term of office
The President shall hold office for a term of five years from the date on which he enters upon his office. He
shall continue to hold office, not withstanding the expiry of his term, until his successor takes charge.
l Procedure for impeachment of the president
} When a President is to be impeached for violation of the Constitution, either House of Parliament can
level the charge as follows:
(a) Resolution which is moved after at least fourteen days’ notice in writing signed by not less than one-
fourth of the total number of members of the House; and
(b) The resolution is passed by a majority of not less than two-thirds of the total membership of the house.

44
ALLEN Social Science
n Powers of the President of India
l Executive Powers
The execuitve powers of the President include:
} Head of the Union Administration
l Appointment of officials of the State : The President makes appointments to key posts to run the
government’s administration. He appoints:
l Diplomatic Powers
} The President has the power of appointing Indian Ambassadors to other countries.
} He receives ambassadors, High Commissioners and diplomatic envoys from foreign nations.
} All treaties and international agreements are concluded in the name of the President.
} The President represents India in International Conferences.
l Legislative Powers
} Addresses Sessions of Parliament
} Summon and Prorogue the Houses

N
} Dissolve the Lok Sabha
} Nomination of Members
} Assent to Bills

E
l Financial Powers
} Money Bills can be introduced only on the recommendation of the President.
} The Annual Budget contains the estimates of income and expenditure of the Union Government for the

L
coming year. The Finance Minister on behalf of the President places the Annual Budget before Parliament.
} The Annual Financial Statement is also laid before the Parliament in the beginning of every Financial

L
Year on behalf of the President.
} The President can authorise withdrawal of advances from the Contingency Found of India to meet unforeseen
expenditure.

A
} After every five years the president appoints a Finance Commission comprising a Chairman and four
other members. The Commission makes recommendations to the President on financial matters.
l Military Powers
} The President is the Supreme Commander of the Armed Forces of India.
} He appoints the Chiefs of the three wings of the Armed Forces, subject to certain rules and regulations.
} The President has the power as to make Declarations of War and Peace on the advice of the Council of
Ministers.
l Judicial Powers
} The President is not answerable before any Court of law for the exercise of the powers and duties of his
office.
} No criminal suit can be initiated against him during his tenure of office.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

} The President has the power to grant pardons, reprieves, respites or remissions of punishment or to
suspend, remit or commute the sentence of any person convicted for an offence:
l Emergency Powers
An Emergency is “a sudden or unforeseen situation demanding immediate action.” It is a situation in which
the Head of State assumes extraordinary powers.
} National or General Emergency : There is a danger of foreign aggression or danger to the peace and
security of the country because of a civil war, insurgency or any other such cause (Article 352).
} Breakdown of Constitutional Machinery: The Constitutional machinery in a State has broken down or
these is a deadlock because of political uncertainties or otherwise (Article 356).
} Financial Emergency : A set-back to the financial stability or credit feasibility of the country is likely to
occur or has occurred (Article 360).

45
Class X ALLEN
n Position of the president
Although the President is only a constitutional head of the State and has little effective power at his disposal, it
would be wrong to call him a ‘figurehead’. The office of the President is one of great honour, Prestige and
dignity. The Constitution ensures that the President is above the normal process of law. All executive power of
the Union is vested in him and is exercised by him directly or through officers subordinate to him. The President
has the right to be informed on all important matters and decisions.
n Vice-President
Article 63 stipulates that there shall be a Vice-President of India.
Qualifications for Election
} A person shall be eligible for election as Vice-President, if he
(a) is a citizen of India;
(b) has completed the age of thirty-five years; and
(c) is qualified for election as a member of the Council of States.
} A person shall not be eligible for election as Vice-President if he holds any office of profit under the

N
Government of India or Government of any State or under any local or other authority subject to the
control of any of the said Governments.
l Election

E
An Electoral College consisting of the members of both Houses of Parliament elects the Vice-President. The
election is held in accordance with the system of proportional representation by means of the single transferable

L
vote. The voting at such an election is by secret ballot. Each nomination paper should be proposed by at least
twenty electors (MPs) and another twenty electors should second the same. Earlier, the requirement was five
proposers and five seconders.

L
l Term of Office
} The Vice-President shall hold office for a term of five years from the date on which he enters upon his
office.

A
} He may, by writing, addressed to the President, resign his office. Such resignation will be communicated
by the President to the Speaker of the Lok Sabha.
} He may, for the violation of the Constitution, be removed from the office by the process of impeachment.
} He shall continue to hold office, notwithstanding the expiry of his term, until his successor enters upon his
office.
l Powers and Functions
} Taking over as the President: The Vice-President takes over the office of the President under the
following situations:
(a) death of the President,
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

(b) resignation of the President,


(c) removal of the President, or
(d) when the President is unable to discharge his functions owing to absence, illness or any other cause.
n The Prime Minister
The Constitution of India provides for a Council of Ministers, with the Prime Minister at the head, to aid and
advise the President.
l Appointment
The Prime Minister is appointed by the President. According to convention, the President invites the leader
of the majority party or group in the Lok Sabha to form the Government. The members of the majority party
or the group elect their leader to be appointed as the Prime Minister. The President then appoints him as the
Prime Minister.

46
ALLEN Social Science
n Council of Ministers
Article 75 of the Constitution states that "the Prime Minister shall be appointed by the President and the other
Ministers shall be appointed by the President on the advice of the Prime Minister." By convention, the President
has to accept the choice of the Prime Minister in the matter of appointment and dismissal of Ministers.
l Cabinet Ministers
They are the most important members of the Council of Ministers. They hold important portfolios, like
Home, Defence, Finance, External Affairs, Railways, etc.
l Ministers of State
They are the second category of Ministers. They may or may not hold an independent charge of any portfolio.
The Prime Minister may or may not consult them. They do not participate in the Cabinet meetings.
The Council of Ministers comprise the Prime Minister and a number of other ministers appointed by the
President on the advice of the Prime Minister.
n Position and powers of the Prime Minister
While the President is the nominal head of State, with the backing of a majority in the Lok Sabha, the Prime
Minister is the real head of the nation. He is the head of the government and answerable to the people of the
country.

N
l Prime Minister and the President
} All authority vested in the President is exercised by the Prime Minister. He is the principal advisor of the
President.

E
} It is on the advice of the Prime Minister that the President summons and prorogues the Parliament and
dissolves the Lok Sabha.
} The Prime Minister chooses the ministers and, on his advice, the President appoints them.

L
} He advises the President on various appointments to important posts such as the Judges of the Supreme
Court, the Governors and ambassadors.

L
} He is a link between the President and the Council of Ministers.
} The President can ask the Council of ministers to reconsider any matter, which has not been considered
by the Cabinet and on which a decision has been taken by a Minister.
l Prime Minister and the cabinet

A
} Leader of the Cabinet: The Prime Minister is the head of the Cabinet. No provision is made in the
Constitution for the appointment of different categories of Ministers such as Ministers of the Cabinet
rank, Ministers of State and Deputy Ministers.
} Power to allocate Portfolios and to reshuffle the Council of Ministers: It is the Prime Minister
who allocates departments or portfolios to the Ministers. He can reshuffle his Council of Ministers whenever
he pleases.
} Power to select and dismiss ministers: The Prime Minister chooses the Ministers and has the power
to dismiss them too. He can ask an erring Minister to resign.
} Power to direct and coordinate policy: The Prime Minister coordinates the working of various
departments so that administration is carried on smoothly.
} Resignation of the Prime Minister: The Prime Minister's resignation implies the resignation of the
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

whole Cabinet.
l Prime Minister as Leader of the Nation
} The Prime Minister represents the nation. When he speaks, the whole nation is supposed to be speaking
through him.
} During a national crisis like war, even the opposition parties support the Prime Minister.
} The Prime Minister decides what kind of relations India would have with other countries.
} The Prime Minister tries to protect the interests of the country in international forums. He discusses
matters of mutual interest with other leaders, keeping the interests of India in mind.
} At the time of General Election, it is the proposed Prime Minister for whom or against whom the people
vote.
} The Prime Minister is also the ex-officio Chairman of the Planning Commission and the Atomic Energy
Commission.
47
Class X ALLEN
n The State Legislature
Some states have only one House of the Legislature known as the Vidhan Sabha (or Legislative Assembly), while
there are others which have two houses of the Legislature. The Lower House is called the Vidhan Sabha (or
Legislative Assembly) while the Upper House is called the Vidhan Parishad (or Legislative Council). States
having Legislative Councils are — Jammu and Kashmir, Uttar Pradesh, Bihar, Maharashtra, Andhra Pradesh
and Karnataka. All the other states have only one house known as the Vidhan Sabha or the Legislative Assembly.
Legislatures having one house are called Unicameral Legislatures and those having two houses are called
Bicameral legislatures.
Governor
Chief Minister

Secretariat Council of Ministers

Chief Secretary Cabinet Ministers

Secretary incharge State Ministers


of department
Deputy Ministers

N
Deputy Secretary

Under Secretary
n The Vidhan Sabha or the Legislative Assembly

E
The Vidhan Sabha of the state can have a maximum membership of 500 and minimum of 60 persons. There
are, however, special provisions in respect of smaller states like Goa, Mizoram, Nagaland and Sikkim etc. Here
the Legislative Assemblies have less than 60 members each. They vary between 30 to 40. This number is fixed

L
by the Parliament in proportion to the population of the state concerned.
The members of the Vidhan Sabha are directly elected by the people for a period of five years in the manner

L
given below:
(i) Universal Adult Franchise, it means any person of the age of 18 years and above can cast his vote.
(ii) Then the system of Secret Ballot is followed. In such a system no one can judge who has voted for whom.
(iii) Some seats are reserved for the members of the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes.

A
Inorder to be elected a member of the Legislative Assembly one should have the following qualifications
(i) He/She should be an Indian Citizen
(ii) He/She should not be less than 25 years of age.
(iii) Their names should be in the Voter's List.
l Duration of the house
The normal duration of Legislative Assembly is five years. However, the Governor may dissolve the House
before its term is over, on the request of Chief Minister. it may also be dissolved earlier, if the President's rule
is proclaimed in the State.
l Functions of the speaker of Legislative Assembly
} The Speaker presides over the meetings of Legislative Assembly and maintains order in the house.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

} He allocates time for various items on the agenda. He also allows members to speak on various subjects.
All the speeches are addressed to the Speaker.
} He signs the Bill before it is sent to the legislative Council or to the Governor for his Assent.
} He appoints Chairmen of all Committees of the House.
} He receives all communications addressed to the House.
n State Legislative Council or Vidhan Parishad
The States of Andhra Pradesh, Bihar, Karnataka, Maharashtra, Uttar Pradesh and Jammu and Kashmir have a
Bicameral Legislature. A state having a Bicameral legislature has the Legislative Council (Vidhan Parishad) as its
Upper House.
In order to be a member of Legislative Council a person
(i) Should be a Citizen of India.
(ii) Should be of 30 years of age or above.
(iii) Should not hold an office of profit.
48
ALLEN Social Science
l Tenure of office
The Vidhan Parishad is a permanent body. The term of office of a member of Vidhan Parishad is 6 years.
One-third of its members retire every second year and an equal number of members are elected in their
place.
l Powers and functions of State Legislature
} The State Legislatures make laws on the 66 subjects given in the State List and 47 Subjects given in the
Concurrent List.
} It passes the Money Bills and the Budget. The Legislative Assembly alone has the power to originate Money
Bills.
} It may approve the Ordinances, which have been issued by the Governor when the Legislative Assembly
was not in Session.
n Passage of ordinary bills by state legislatures
(i) Ordinary Bills can be introduced in any of the House — Vidhan Sabha or the Vidhan Parishad. They can be
introduced by either a minister or any other member.

N
(ii) After the Governor signs the Bill, it becomes an Act (or a Law). The Governor may not give his assent or may
send the Bill back to the Legislature for reconsideration. He may also reserve the bill for the consideration of

E
the President, in which case it can become an Act only when the President assents to it.
n Passage of money bill
So far as a Money Bill is concerned, it can originate only in Vidhan Sabha. It is introduced by a minister with

L
Governor's consent. After the Money Bill is passed by Vidhan Sabha, it sent to the Vidhan Parishad. The Vidhan
Parishad has to return the Bill within 14 days, if it is not returned within 14 days, it is considered as passed by

L
both Houses and is sent to the Governor for assent.
n Comparison of Legislative Assembly and the Legislative Council
(i) The Oridinary Bills can originate in any House. The Legislative Council can only delay the Bill by three

A
months.
(ii) The Money Bill are introduced only in Legislative Assembly. Legislative Council can delay it only for 14 days.
(iii) Ministers are responsible only to the Legislative Assembly. The only power that Legislative Council has is the
right to ask questions.
(iv) The members of Legislative Council do not participate in the election of President of India.
In brief, it is the Legislative Assembly that occupies a dominant position.
n Administration of the state
The Constitutional Head of the State is the Governor, who administers with the help of Council of Ministers. The
Union Territories are administered by the President, who appoints suitable officers for this purpose.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

n Governor
The Governor acts in two capacities — as Constitutional Head of the State and as an Agent of the Central
Government in the State.
l Appointment of the Governor
The President can appoint a person as Governor who:-
} is a citizen of India.
} is not less than 35 years of age.
} is not a member of the Parliament or any State Legislature.
l Term of office
The Governor holds office for a term of five years.

49
Class X ALLEN
n Powers of the Governor
l Executive Powers
All the executive powers of the State Government are vested in the Governor. He usually exercises these
powers on the advice of the Council of Ministers.
} He appoints the Chief Minister and appoints other ministers on the advice of the Chief Minister.
} He appoints the Attorney General, the Advocate General, the Chairman and members of the State
Public Service Commission.
} He is consulted by the President while appointing judges of the State High Court.
l Legislative Powers
} No bill can become an Act unless it is signed by the Governor.
} He summons the session of the State Lesiglature.
l Judicial Powers
} The President appoints the judges of the State High Court in consulation with the Governor.
} The Governor grants pardons and may reduce or suspend the sentence (punishment) of any person.
The Chief Minister and his cabinet

N
n
l As a matter of fact, the Chief Minister has the same powers in the state as the Prime Minister has at the
Centre.

E
l The Governor acts on the advice of the Chief Minister.
l If the Chief Minister enjoys support of the majority of the members, he cannot be removed from his office by
the Governor.

L
l Qualifications of the Chief Minister
Qualifications to become Chief Minister of a State are the same as those of an ordinary member of the
house.

L
} Should be a Citizen of India.
} Should be of 30 years of age or above.
l Powers of the Chief Minister

A
} Formation of the Cabinet : The other ministers are appointed by the Governor on the advice of the
Chief Minister.
} Allocation of Departments : The Chief Minister may assign any department to any of the ministers.
He can ask any minister at any time to resign.
} Head of the Council of Ministers : The Chief Minister presides over the meetings of the Cabinet.
} Leader of the Legislative Assembly : The Chief Minister is the Leader of the Legislative Assembly.
The Speaker of the Legislative Assembly prepares schedule of meetings of the Assembly in consultation
with the Chief Minister.
} Principle Advisor to the Governor : The Governor appoints various officials on the advice of the Chief
Minister.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

} A link between the Governor and the Council of Ministers : Chief Minister communicates to the
Governor all decisions of the Council of Ministers.

50
ALLEN Social Science
THE CENTRAL AND STATE GOVERNMENTS EXERCISE
1. The Money Bill when passed by Lok Sabha is sent 9. The political party, which is unable to get a majority
to in Legislative Assembly is known as the
(1) The President (2) Rajya Sabha (1) Ruling Party
(3) The Prime Minister (4) Finance Minister (2) Opposition
2. The Central Council of Ministers for its functions is (3) Non Legislative Party
responsible to (4) Non Assembly Party
(1) The Lok Sabha (2) The Rajya Sabha 10. In India what is the most important organ of the
(3) The Parliament (4) The Speaker state ?

3. The name of the Union Legislature in India is (1) Legislative Assembly

(1) The Parliament (2) Lok Sabha (2) Lok Sabha

(3) Legisaltive Assembly (4) Rajya Sabha (3) Rajya Sabha

N
(4) Chief Election Commissioner
4. Who acts as the ex-officio Chairman of the Rajya
Sabha ? 11. The Members of the Legislative Assembly (MLAs )
belong to the
(1) Prime Minister

E
(1) same political party
(2) Vice-President
(2) different political parties
(3) President

L
(3) pressure groups
(4) Speaker of the Lok Sabha
(4) None of these
5. Which one of the following is appointed by the

L
12. What are members of the Legislative Assembly
President of India ?
called ?
(1) Chief Justice of the Supreme Court
(1) MLA (2) MLC
(2) Chief Minister of State

A
(3) MP (4) SLA
(3) District Judge
13. What is a coalition government ?
(4) District Magistrate
(1) Single Party Dominance
6. The Head of the Council of MInisters is known as
(2) Group of parties
(1) The President of India
(3) Non-elected members
(2) Speaker of the Lok Sabha (4) Leftist parties dominance
(3) The Prime Minister of India 14. In India, the Constitutional head of the State is the
(4) The Chairman of the Rajya Sabha (1) Prime Minister (2) Chief Minister
7. The member os the Council of Ministers are (3) Election Commissioner (4) Governor
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

appointed by the President on the advice of the


15. How is a governor appointed ?
(1) The Prime Minister (1) Governor is appointed by the central government
(2) Speaker of the Lok Sabha (2) Governor is appointed by the state government
(3) The Finance Minister (3) He is elected by the people
(4) The Home Minister (4) Appointed by the President
8. Who was the first Deputy Prime Minister of India ? 16. Who elects MLAs ?
(1) B.R Ambedkar (1) People
(2) Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel (2) Prime Minister
(3) Govind Ballabh Pant (3) An entrance test
(4) C. Rajagopalachari (4) President
51
Class X ALLEN
17. The state with the largest number of MLA 21. After the elections, the majority party chooses its
constituencies is (1) leader (2) representative
(1) Uttar Pradesh (2) Bihar (3) minister (4) head
(3) Delhi (4) Rajasthan 22. The government of a state fulfill its duties with the
18. MLAs are elected by the help of different
(1) doctors (1) Ministries
(2) public (2) Pressure groups
(3) collectors (3) Political parties
(4) chief medical officers. (4) Non-Governmental Organisations
19. In democracy, the government is formed by the 23. The head of a state executive is the
(1) public (1) Chief Minister (2) Governor
(2) collectors
(3) MLA (4) Collector
(3) ministers
24. A Legislative Assembly makes laws for the entire

N
(4) people's representatives
(1) nation (2) state
20. The Chief Minister is appointed by the
(3) district (4) rural areas

E
(1) minority party (2) opposition
(3) people (4) governor 25. The Parliament makes the laws for the entire
(1) nation (2) state

L
(3) district (4) rural areas

A L CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 2 3 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 4 4 1 1 2 1 4
Que. 21 22 23 24 25
Ans. 1 1 2 2 1

52
ALLEN Social Science
12. INDIAN DEMOCRACY AT WORK

n The Decision Makers


l President is the head of the state and is the highest formal authority in the country.
l Prime Minister is the head of the government and actually exercises all governmental powers. He takes
most of the decisions in the Cabinet meetings.
l Parliament consists of two Houses,Lok Sabha and Rajya Sabha. The parliament makes important laws to
be followed by everyone.
n A long chain of events before the passing of Government Order for OBC Reservation
l The Government of India had appointed the Second Backward Classes Commission in 1979. It was headed
by B.P. Mandal. Hence it was popularly called the Mandal Commission.
l The Commission gave its Report in 1980 and made many recommendations. One of these was that 27 per
cent of government jobs be reserved for the socially and economically backward classes.
l For several years, many parliamentarians and parties kept demanding the implementation of the Commis-

N
sion’s recommendations.
l Then came the Lok Sabha electionof 1989. In its election manifesto, the Janata Dal promised that if voted
to power, it would implement the Mandal Commission report.

E
l The Janata Dal did form the government after this election. Its leader V. P.Singh became the Prime Minister
and he implemented it.

L
n Involvement of several Political Institutions in implementing OBC Reservation (Mandal Commission
Recommendations):
l The President of India in his address to the Parliament announced the intention of the government to imple-

L
ment the recommendations of the Mandal Commission.
} On 6 August 1990, the Union Cabinet took a formal decision to implement the recommendations.
} Next day Prime Minister V.P. Singh informed the Parliament about this decision through a statement in

A
both the Houses of Parliament.
} The decision of the Cabinet was sent to the Department of Personnel and Training. The senior officers
ofthe Department drafted an order inline with the Cabinet decision and took the minister’s approval.
} An officer signed the order on behalf ofthe Union Government. This was how OBC reservation bill was
born on August 13, 1990. Many approached the Supreme Court and the Supreme Court judges in
1992 declared that this order of the Government of India was valid.
l What are political Institutions? Need for Political Institutions in India
Several arrangements to provide social security, education, health and basic needs are made inall modern
democracies. Such arrangements are called institutions.A democracy works well when these institutions
perform functions assigned to them.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

} The Parliament makes important laws for the entire nation.


} The Prime Minister and the Cabinet are institutions that take all important policy decisions.
} The Civil Servants, working together, are responsible for taking steps to implement the ministers’decisions.
} Supreme Court is an institution where disputes between citizens and the government are finally settled.
l What is Parliament?Why do we need a Parliament?
An assembly of elected representatives which exercises supreme political authority on behalf of the people.
In India such anational assembly of elected representatives is called Parliament.
} Parliament is the final authority for making laws in any country.Parliaments all over the world can make
newlaws, change existing laws, or abolish existing laws and make new ones in their place.
} Parliaments all over the world exercise some control over those who run the government. In some
countries like India this control is direct and full.

53
Class X ALLEN
} Parliaments control all the money that governments have. In most countries the public money can be
spent only when the Parliament sanctions it.
} Parliament is the highest forum of discussion and debate on public issues and national policy in any
country. Parliament can seek information about any matter.
l Two Houses of Parliament
} In our country, the Parliament consists of two Houses. The two Houses are known as the Council of States
(Rajya Sabha) and the Houseof the People (Lok Sabha).
} The total number of elected members of LokSabha is 543+2 Anglo Indian nominated members.The
total number of members of Rajya Sabha is 238+12 nominated members.
} Members of Lok Sabha are elected by the people. Members of Rajya Sabha are elected by the MLAs and
MPs.
} The length of the term of Lok Sabha members is 5 years.The length of the term of Rajya Sabha mem-
bers is 6 years
} Lok Sabha can be dissolved but Raya Sabha is permanent and only the members retire.

N
l How does LokSabha exercise supreme power than RajyaSabha?
} Any ordinary law needs to bepassed by both the Houses. But if there is a difference between the two

E
Houses, the final decision is taken in a joint session in which the view of the Lok Sabha is likely to prevail.
} LokSabha exercises more powers in money matters. Once the Lok Sabha passes the budget of the

L
government or any other money related law, the Rajya Sabha cannot reject but can only delay it by 14
days.
} Most importantly, the Lok Sabha controls the Council of Ministers. Only a person who enjoys the support

L
of the majority of the members in the LokSabha is appointed the Prime Minister.
} If the majority of the Lok Sabha members say they have ‘no confidence’ in the Council of Ministers, all
ministers including the Prime Minister, have to quit. The Rajya Sabha does not have this power.

A
n Executive
At different levels of any government we find functionarie swho take day-to-day decisions and implement those
decisions on behalf of the people. All those functionaries are collectively known as the executive.
l Political and PermanentExecutive
} Politician who is elected by the people for a specific period is called the political executive. Political
leaders who take the big decisions fall in this category.
} Officers who are appointed on a long-term basis based on their qualification and experience. They are
called the permanent executive or civil servants. They remain in office even when the ruling party
changes.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

l Why does the political executive have more power than the non-political executive? OR
Why is the minister more powerful than the civil servant?
} In a democracy the will of the people is supreme. The minister is elected by the people and thus empow-
ered to exercise the will of the people on their behalf.
} The Minister is finally answerable to the people for all the consequences of her decision. That is why the
minister takes all the final decisions.
} The minister decides the overall framework and objectives in which decisions on policy should be made.
} The minister is not expected to be an expert in the matters of her ministry. The minister takes the advice
of experts on all technical matters.
} The experts can tell the route, but the minister with a larger view decides the destination.

54
ALLEN Social Science
l Council of Ministers and Types of ministers: Council of Ministers is the official name for the body that
includes allthe Ministers. It usually has 60 to80 Ministers of different ranks.
} Cabinet Ministers are usually top-level leaders of the ruling party or parties who are in charge of the
major ministries. Usually the Cabinet Ministers meet to take decisions in the name of the Council of
Ministers.
} Ministers of State with independentcharge are usually in-chargeof smaller Ministries. They partici-
pate in the Cabinet meetings only when specially invited.
} Ministers of State or Deputy ministers are attached to and required to assist Cabinet Ministers in their
work.
l Prime Minister and Powers of the Prime Minister : Prime Minister is the most important political
institution in the country.The President appoints the leader of the majority party or the coalition of parties
that commands a majority in the Lok Sabha, as Prime Minister.
} Ashead of the government, the PrimeMinister has wide ranging powers.
} He chairs Cabinet meetings. He coordinates the work of differentDepartments. His decisions are finalin

N
case disagreements arise between Departments.
} He exercises general supervision of different ministries. All ministers work under his leadership.

E
} The Prime Minister distributes and redistributes workto the ministers. He also has thepower to dismiss ministers.
} Whenthe Prime Minister quits, the entire ministry quits.The Cabinet is the most powerful institution in

L
India and with in the Cabinet the Prime Minister who is the most powerful.
n Prime Ministerial form of Government
The powers of the Prime Minister in all parliamentary democracies of theworld have increased so much inrecent

L
decades that parliamentary democracies are seen as Prime Ministerial form of government.
l The President and Powers of the President : The President is the head of the State. The Presidentof
India is like the Queen of Britain whose functions are to a large extent ceremonial. The President is elected

A
by all the Members of Parliament (MPs) and Members of State Legislative Assemblies (MLAs).
} The President supervisesthe overall functioning of all the political institutions in the country so that they
operate in harmony to achieve the objectives of the state.
} All governmental activities take place in the name of the President. All laws and major policy decisionsof
the government are issued in her name.
} All major appointments are made in the name of the President. These include the appointment of the
Chief Justice of India, the Judges of the Supreme Court and the High Courts, the Governors, the Election
Commissioners, ambassadors to other countries, etc.
} All international treaties and agreements are made in the name of the President.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

} The President is the supreme commander of the defence forces of India. President exercises all these
powers only on the advice of the Council of Ministers.
What is Judiciary?
All the courts at different levels in a country put together are called the judiciary.The Indian judiciary consists of
a Supreme Court for the entire nation,High Courts in the states, District Courts and the courts at local level.
l Types of cases or disputes handled by the courts:
} Cases Between citizens of the country.
} Cases between citizens and government.
} Cases between two or more state governments; and
} Cases between governments at the union and state level.
55
Class X ALLEN
l Powers of the Supreme Court and High Court
} Supreme Court is the highest court of appeal in civil and criminal cases. It can hear appeals against the
decisions of the High Courts.
} The Supreme Court and the HighCourts have the power to interpret the Constitution of the country.
Theycan declare invalid any law of the legislature if they find such a law or action is against the Constitution.
} The Supreme Court can determine the Constitutional validity of any legislation or action of the executive
in the country, when it is challenged before them. This is known as the judicial review.
} The powers and the independence of the Indian judiciary allow it to act as the guardian of the Fundamental
Rights. We shall see in the next chapter that the citizens have a right to approach the courts to seek
remedy in case of any violation of their rights
} Courts have given several judgments and directives to protect public interest and human rights. Anyone can
approach the courts if public interest is hurt by the actionsof government. This is called public interest
litigation.
l Independence of the judiciary

N
} Independence of the judiciary means that it is not under the control of the legislature or the executive.
The judges do not act on the direction of the government or according to the wishes of the party in power.

E
} The judges of the Supreme Court and the High Courts are appointed by the President on the advice of
the Prime Minister and in consultation with the Chief Justice of the Supreme Court. Once aperson is
appointed as judge of the Supreme Court or the High Court it is nearly impossible to remove him or her from

L
that position.
} A judge can be removed only by an impeachment motion passed separately by two-thirds members of

L
the two Houses of the Parliament.

A CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

56
ALLEN Social Science
INDIAN DEMOCRACY AT WORK EXERCISE
1. “ Indira Sawhnay and others vs Union of India” case 10. The judges of the Supreme Court are appointed
was related to the by the

(1) Centre and state relations (1) Parliament


(2) Prime Minister
(2) Reservations of OBCs
(3) President on the advice of Prime Minister
(3) Electoral Reforms
(4) Governor
(4) Economic Policies
11. Permanent executive is also known as
2. The president of India may have a choice in the
(1) Prime Minister’s office (2) President
appointment of the Prime Minister when
(3) Civil Servants (4) Political Parties
(1) one party has an overwhelming majority in the
12. Head of the government in India is
lok sabha.
(1) President (2) Prime Minister
(2) one party has an absolute majority in the lok
(3) Governor (4) Chief Minister
sabha.

N
13. Identify the institution which exercises more power
(3) no party is having a minority in the lok sabha. in money matters
(4) no single party is having an absolute majority (1) Lok Sabha (2) Rajay sabha

E
in the lok sabha. (3) Prime Minister (4) Supreme Court
3. The Mandal Commission was established in 14. In a democracy executive works with the help of the

L
(1) 1979 (2) 1989 (1) autocratic government
(3) 1990 (4) 1995 (2) political parties

L
4. The institution that enforces the laws made by the (3) law making body
legislature is (4) constituent assembly
(1) Planning Commission (2) Election commissioner 15. Necessary information to the ministers is provided
by

A
(3) Executive (4) Judiciary
(1) technical staff
5. The President can be removed from office by a
(2) secretaries of each ministry
procedure known as
(3) members of the lok sabha
(1) impeachment (2) secret ballot
(4) rajya sabha members
(3) open discussion (4) Chief Minister
16. All important policy decisions of the government are
6. Government collect taxes to spend money on the taken by the
(1) leaders (2) welfare programmes (1) opposition party.
(3) political parties (4) elections (2) civil servants.
7. The Indian president is elected by the (3) prime minister and cabinet ministers.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

(4) citizens
(1) people (2) parliament
17. No-confidence motion is passes in the Lok Sabha
(3) electoral college (4) legislative assembly
against the
8. The Mandal Commission was set up under the Prime
(1) independent candidate (2) ruling party.
Minister
(3) opposition party (4) president.
(1) Morarji Desai (2) Indira Gandhi
18. Cabinet meetings are held by the
(3) Rajiv Gandhi (4) Pt. Jawahar Lal Nehru (1) people (2) speaker
9. The head of the Indian Republic according to (3) Prime Minister (4) Supreme Court
Article 52 of the constitution is the 19. The first session of the Lok Sabha was held in
(1) President (2) Vice president (1) 1947 (2) 1948
(3) Prime Minister (4) Governor (3) 1950 (4) 1952
57
Class X ALLEN
20. The presiding officer of the lok Sabha is the 23. Name the first women speaker of Lok Sabha.
(1) President (2) Prime Minister (1) Mamta Banerji (2) Meera Kumar
(3) Speaker (4) Deputy speaker (3) Shushma Swaraj (4) Vijay Raj Sindhia
21. In India, a national assembly of elected representa- 24. The Council of Ministers at the centre is respon-
tives is called sible to :
(1) Judiciary. (1) The President (2) The Prime Minister
(2) Parliament.
(3) The Rajya Sabha (4) The Lok Sabha
(3) Local self government.
25. The president of India is elected by
(4) Committees of Supreme Court.
22. Lok Sabha exercises more powers than Rajya (1) Direet Election by citizens
Sabha in the matters related to (2) Indirect Election by the Electoral College
(1) President impeachment (3) The Prime Minister and the Council of Ministers
(2) President elections
(4) None of the above
(3) money

N
(4) agriculture

L E
A L CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 2 4 3 3 1 2 3 1 1 3 3 2 1 2 2 3 2 3 4 3
Que. 21 22 23 24 25
Ans. 2 3 2 4 2

58
ALLEN Social Science
13. INDIA'S FOREIGN POLICY
n Introduction
Our foreign policy is based on the principle of peaceful coexistence. From the very beginning, India protested
against any form of colonialism, racism and fascism. It’s based on our traditions, culture and the aims and
objectives of our freedom fighters.
n Basic principles of India’s Foreign Policy
l Promotion of world peace : Peace is the most essential factor for the economic development of a country
in particular and the world in general. India believes in settling all international disputes peacefully, as wars
and conflicts can only hamper the progress of trade and commerce.
l Anti-imperialism and anti-colonialism : Colonialism, according to India’s foreign policy, is a violation of
human rights and a source of international conflicts. India has always been in full support of the Asian and
African countries, which were struggling for their independence. It opposed French imperialism in Indo-
China and supported the freedom movements in Egypt, Morocco, Tunisia, Ghana, etc.
l Anti-racism : India has always opposed racism passionately. It was against the ‘white policy’ adopted by the

N
government of South Africa and gave its whole-hearted support to Nelson Mandela, the leader of South
Africa in the apartheid struggle.
n Non-aligned movement (NAM)

E
l Foundation : The foundation of this policy was laid down by Nehru at the Bandung conference held in
1955. He received full-fledged support from eminent leaders like General Nasser of Egypt, President

L
Sukarno of Indonesia and President Tito of Yugoslavia in 1961. At present, there are 120 countries that
have joined the NAM.
l Principles of NAM :

L
} Stay away from the control of the superpowers;
} Fight for the end of colonislism;
} Encourage disarmament;

A
} Protect human rights;
} Bridge the gulf between the developed and developing countries;
} Freedom to carry out independent foreign and domestic policies;
} Protect the environment.
l Significance of NAM in today's world : The Cold War came to an end in 1991 with the collapse of the
USSR. The world increasingly became unipolar. However, even in the changing scenario of the world politics,
NAM continues to play an important role. The NAM has assisted the world in solving the following problems.
} Protecting the environment;
} Developing the economies of the third world countries;
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

} Encouraging disarmament;
} Protecting human rights;
} Encouraging people to fight against over-population, illiteracy and poverty;
} Promoting awareness against international terrorism;
} Promoting international peace and understanding.
n SAARC
l Member state : The SAARC, or the South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation, is an organisation
of India and its eight neigbhours—Sri Lanka, Maldives, Pakistan, Nepal, Bhutan, Bangladesh, Myanmar and
Afghanistan — set up for helping each other in fighting problems.
l Foundation : Thus, the first meet of the SAARC took place in December 1985 in Dhaka, the captial of
Bangladesh. It’s headquarters are situated in Kathmandu, Nepal.

59
Class X ALLEN
l Principles : The SAARC has certain guiding principles enshrined in its constitution.
} Respecting territorial integrity, cultural cooperation, sovereignty and the right to be independent of all
the member states
} Promoting socio-economic and cultural cooperation among each other
} Maintaining a policy of non-interference in each other’s internal affairs
} Keeping all the bilateral issues out of the SAARC; only the issues concerning at least three countries can
be discussed on this forum
} For any resolution to be passed at the SAARC, the unanimity of all the members is needed.
l Summits of SAARC : So far fifteen summits of the SAARC have taken place, but except for a handful of
successes in the socio-economic sector, the SAARC has not been as successful as the EU (European Union).
The only reason that can be cited is the bitter political and military enmity between the two most powerful
members of the SAARC—India and Pakistan, which has overshadowed nearly all the summits.
The success of the SAARC lies in the fields of culture and sports through its two wings—SAVE and SAF—
which act as platforms for the promotion of cultural and sports ties among the members.

N
l SAVE : The SAVE, or SAARC Audio Visual Exchange, is a forum for cultural exchange among the members
of the SAARC. It has been able to organise cultural programmes and provide scholarships to students for the
study and understanding of different cultures of South Asia. And it has been successful in its aims.

E
l SAF : Another forum of the SAARC is SAF, that is, the South Asian Federation. It is a sports body, which
looks after sports ties among the SAARC members. The first SAF games was held in Kathmandu, Nepal, in
1983. Since then, it has been organising this sports meet every two years in various cities of the subcontinent,

L
with occassional gaps due to the political and military tensions between India and Pakistan. Till date, there
have been eleven such meets, and it can be said without any doubt that the SAF has been successful in

L
opening up an opportunity to bring together the athletes and players of the SAARC countries on a common
platform, and spreading the idea of harmony through participation in sports among the member-states of
the SAARC, which is most vital for the overall growth of the region.
l Find out the name of the organisation being highlighted in the picture.

A
l Name the latest country to join this organisation.
n India and its neighbours
India adopted a policy of friendliness with its neighbouring countries—Pakistan, Nepal, Bhutan, Bangladesh,
China, Sri Lanka, Afghanistan and Myanmar. To strengthen its bond with the neighblours, it played an active
role in the formation of the SAARC.
l India and Pakistan : Pakistan was formed after the partition of British India in 1947. The Kashmir issue
has always been a major cause of conflict between the two countries.
Soon after independence, India had to face an attack on Kashmir made by Pakistan. Sardar Vallabhai Patel,
the then home minister of India, sent armed forces to check its advancement. Although the UN brought
about a ceasefire, a part of Kashmir is still under Pakistan.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

Once again, Pakistan tried to capture Kashmir in 1965. This too turned out to be a failure as the UN
intervened and declared a ceasefire.
The Tashkent Agreement was signed in January 1966, with the hape of improving results between the two
countries. But no positive results came out of it.
Another major war broke out between India and Pakistan in 1971, when there was a movement going on
against West Pakistan by the freedom fighters of East Pakistan. India was compelled to intervene and war
broke out between India and Pakistan on 3 December 1971 and continued for fourteen days after which
General Niazi surrendered on 16 December 1971. A new nation, known as Bangladesh, was born with
Shaikh Mujibur Rehman as the Prime Minister.
The Shimla Agreement was signed in 1972 by India and Pakistan. By this agreement, both the countries
agreed to return each other’s territories and prisoners of war.

60
ALLEN Social Science
l India and Bangladesh : Though India was the first country to recognise the independence of Bangladesh,
the relationship between the two countries strained, after the murder of Shaikh Mujibur Rehman, over the
issue of sharing the waters of the Ganga. An agreement has been signed between the two over this issue and
India is trying her level best to maintain peaceful relations with Bangladesh.
l India and China : The relation between India and China goes back to the ancient period. Both the countries
maintained commercial relations with one another. India offered its full support to the communist takeover of
China in 1949. It backed the Chinese admission to the UN. In 1957, the Chinese Prime Minister Zhou Enlai
signed the Panchsheel Agreement with Pandit Jawaharlal Nehru.
In 1962, the relations between India and China began to strain when China occupied Ladakh and parts of
Arunachal Pradesh, and refused to recognise the McMahon Line as the Indo-China border. This brought
about the Indo-China war, which came to a close in Novermber 1962, restoring normal relations between
the two countries.
However India’s relationship with China is still strained as some bilateral issues, including the Chinese refusal
to recognise Arunachal Pradesh as a part of India, remains unsolved.
l India’s relationship with Nepal and Bhutan : Nepal and Bhutan maintain cordial relations with India

N
and follow a policy of mutual respect and non-interference. India gave them economic support and helped
them in various projects like the construction of many roads, bridges and irrigational works.
l India and Sri Lanka : India’s relationship was cordial with Sri Lanka till a civil war broke out in its northern

E
provinces, when a separatist movement was started by the Tamil population, demanding a separate Tamil
nation, or Eelam. This movement was led by the LTTE (Liberation Tigers of Tamil Eelam).
India sent peacekeeping forces at the request of the Sri Lankan government. They were withdrawn in 1990,

L
although no peace was restored. As a consequence of Indian intervention into Sro Lanka, the Indian Prime
Minister, Rajiv Gandhi was assassinated by a suicide bomber of the LTTE in 1991. India has now detached
herself from the internal affairs of Sri Lanka.

L
l India and Myanmar : The relationship between India and Myanmar is one of friendship. The Prime Minister,
Rajiv Gandhi’s visit to Myanmar in 1987 fostered better relations between the two countries. India helped
her in the following ways.

A
} To secure the Commonwealth economic and military aid
} To promote trade relations
However, India supports the democratic movement led by Aung-San Suu-ki.
n United Nations Organisation
l Formation of UN
The United Nations Organisation, or the UN, was formed due to the efforts of the heads of the three
superpowers, which formed the Allied Powers during the Second World War-Winston Churchill, the Prime
Minister of Great Britain, Franklin Roosevelt, the President of USA, and Joseph Stalin, the president of the
erstwhile USSR. All three of them took part in the three conferences organised during the war Dumbarton
Oaks in Washington DC, Yalta in Crimea and the San Francisco Conference.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

In these conferences, the idea of a world body was discussed and debated, and in the San Francisco Conference
in June 1945, the three superpowers and China drafted the aims, purpose and the structure of a further
organisation, with the hope that it would work better than its predecessor, the League of Nations, which
failed miserably in dealing with world issues.
The United Nations Organisation took final shape through the signing of the Atlantic Charter on 26 June
1945, by fifty nations. And on 24 October 1945, the UNO was established with its headquarters in New
York.
l Membership
Initially, there were fifty members of the UN, but over the past six decades, the number has gone up to
193. This can be explained through the decolonisation of several countries in Africa and Asia after the Second
World War, many of which were triggered by the passing of the Declaration on the Granting of Independence
to Colonial Countries and Peoples by the UN General Assembly in 1960.

61
Class X ALLEN
l Objectives
The main objectives of the UN are:
} To maintain international peace and security;
} To develop friendly relations among nations;
} To settle disputes among nations that may disturb world peace.
} To render economic, social and scientific assistance to the developing nations.
l Language and flag
The official languages of the UN are French, English, Spanish, Russian, Chinese and Arabic. The UN flag
is very unique with two olive branches symbolising peace. There is a world map between the open branches
on a light blue background.
n Organs of the UNO
The UNO has six principal organs.
} The General Assembly
} The Security Council

N
} The Economic and Social Council
} The Trusteeship Council

E
} The International Court of Justice
} The Secretariat.

L
l General Assembly
} Membership : All those who are the members of the UN are the members of the General Assembly.
Each member nation is permitted to send five representatives, out of which only one is entitled to vote.

L
The General Assembly meets once in a year. However, special sessions may be held during emergencies.
The decisions in the General Assembly are taken by a simple majority and in certain important cases
by a two-third majority.

A
} Functions
(i) The General Assembly admits members to the Security Council.
(ii) It appoint the Secretary General on the recommendation of the Security Council.
(iii) The Assembly discusses international problems and suggests solutions to the same.
(iv) It receives reports from the UN and discusses them.
(v) It alerts the Security Council when the world is in danger
} It considers and approves the UN budget.
} It supervises the work of the other organs of the UN.
l Security Council
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

} Membership : The Security Council is responsible for the maintenance of peace and security in the world.
It has five permanent members and ten non-permanent members. The Five permanent members of
the Security Council are China, Russia, France, the USA and the UK. The ten non-permanent members
are elected by the General Assembly for two years. The permanent members are entitled to enjoy the
veto power, or the power to cast negative votes in order reject a decision.
} Functions
(i) Maintains international peace and security.
(ii) Recommends peaceful settlements of disputes after investigations.
(iii) Takes military action against any aggressor, if required
(iv) Elects judges of the International Court of Justice.
(v) Recommends admission of new members
62
ALLEN Social Science
l Economic and Social Council
} Membership : The Economic and Social Council, or the ECOSOC, has fifyt-four members elected by
the General Assembly for a period of three years. It meets twice a year and holds special sessions, if
required.
} Functions
(i) It serves as the central forum for discussing international economic and social issues and for formulating
policy recommendations addressed to the member states and the UNO systems.
(ii) It conducts studies regarding economic, social, cultural, education health and other related matters,
and reports to the General Assembly.
(iii) It coordinates the activities of the specialised agencies.
l Trusteeship Council
The territories conquered from Germany, Japan and Italy after the Second World War were placed under the
Trusteeship Council. They were administered by the UN members in such a way that they gradually became
independent. The Council functioned under the authority of the General Assembly.

N
l International Court of Justice
The International Court of Justice consists of fifteen judges elected by the General Assembly for a period
of nine years. The Security Council supervises the election of the judges. However, there cannot be two judges

E
from the same country. It has its headquarters at The Hague.
l Functions

L
} Settles disputes of the members countries
} Acts as legal advisor to other organs of the UN
l Secretariat

L
The Secretariat is the main administrative organ of the UNO, having a large staff comprising about 16,000
workers from nearly 170 countries. It has its headquarters at New York. The secretary general heads the
UN secretariat. He is elected for a five-year term. The present Secretary General is Ban ki Moon from South

A
Korea.
n Specialised agencies of the UNO
Special agencies like the FAO, UNICEF and UNESCO have been set up to achieve the goals set by the UN.
These agencies work under the supervision of the Economic and Social Council to promote the welfare of the
people.
n India and the UN
Being a peace-loving country, India has always been supportive of the UN and its missions.
l India has always supported the anti-colonial movements in the former European colonies of Angola, Libya,
Malaysia, Tunisia, Indonesia, etc. It has raised its voice against the South African Government's policy of racial
discrimination, or the apartheid. It has helped the UN to admit new member states. India has sent its armed
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

forces as part of the UN peackeeping forces to places like Palestine, Somalia, Bosnia, Iraq and Afghanistan.
l Further, India has helped in many ways the other agencies of the UN to operate from its soil and spread
the awareness of the issues they are fighting against.
On the flip side, India has been a beneficiary of the UN help, too.
l Agriculture in Rajasthan has been made possible with the help of the FAO. FAO has also helped the once
uncultivated region of tarai in Uttar Pradesh to made viable for cultivation. It has helped India set up many
institutes for the development of cottage industries and for higher learning. the most significant effort of the
FAO has been the Freedom from Hunger, a campaign launched in 1960, in India. It has been very successful
l The WHO has helped India fight many diseases like malaria, tuberculosis and smallpox. It has also helped
India to improve its medical infrastructure and has provided medical training to many deserving students.
l The UNICEF has been very active in India in its drive to abolish child labour from the country.
63
Class X ALLEN
INDIA'S FOREIGN POLICY EXERCISE
1. The relationship between India and Myanmar is one 8. In which city was the first summit of Non Aligned
of Movement held ?
(1) Enmity (2) Hostility (1) New Delhi (2) Cairo
(3) Friendship (4) None of these (3) Belgrade (4) Jakarta
2. So far how many summits of SAARC have taken 9. The First Summit of “SAARC” took place at
place ? (1) Bangalore (2) Kathmandu
(1) 15 (2) 18 (3) 20 (4) 25 (3) Islamabad (4) Dhaka
3. The cold war came to an end in. 10. When was the SAARC founded ?
(1) 1991 (2) 2001 (1) 1984 (2) 1985
(3) 2005 (4) 2010 (3) 1986 (4) 1987
4. It was the first co untry to recognise the 11. When is Universal Human Rights Day celebrated ?
independence of Bangladesh. (1) 6 September (2) 2 Oct

N
(1) India (2) Pakistan (3) 10 Dec (4) 10 Nov
(3) USA (4) Russia 12. The Head Quarters of SAARC is located in

E
5. The foundation of NAM policy was laid down by (1) Bangalore (2) Kathmandu
(1) Subhadh Chandra Bose (3) Dhaka (4) Islamabad
13. Second War between Indian and Palkistan took

L
(2) Mahatma Gandhi
place in
(3) Jawaharlal Nehru
(1) 1965 (2) 1970

L
(4) Shaikh Mujibur Rehman
(3) 1971 (4) 1972
6. Who amongst the following is not associated with
14. The office of the International Court of Justice is
the Non-Aligned Movement ?
situated in

A
(1) Naseer of Egypt (2) Sukarto of Indonesia
(1) New York (2) London
(3) J.N Nehru of India (4) Chou-en-Li of China
(3) Hague (4) Paris
7. Who amingst the following was a pioneer of the
15. How many judges are there in International Court
Non-Aligned Movement ? of Justice ?
(1) Marshal Tito (2) Joseph Stalin (1) 10 (2) 12
(3) Winston Churchill (4) Franklin Roosevelt (3) 15 (4) 18
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\02 Civics.

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Ans. 3 1 1 1 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 2 3 3 3

64
ALLEN Social Science

14. INDIA-SIZE AND LOCATION


India is a peninsula, situated in the southeastern part of Asia. The country occupies 2.4 per cent of the total
area of the world. It is the seventh largest country in the world in terms of size and the second largest country in
the world in terms of population. India has an area of 3.24 million square kilometres; the areas of Russia,
Canada, China, USA, Brazil and Australia and larger than India. India’s total population of 1.21 billion (2011)
is second only to China.

n Indian sub continent

Indian is called a sub-continent because of the variation in relief features, climate, natural vegetation and the
people, Countries belonging to the Indian sub-continent are India, Pakistan, Nepal, Bhutan and Bangladesh. Sri
Langka, India’s neighbouring island in the south, is often considered as a part of the Indian sub-continent. India
is a land of unity in diversity. Diversity in races and creeds, language, religion, tradition and culture exists in the
country.

N
n Boundaries and neighbours of India

The mainland of India extends from 8°4’N to 37°6’N latitudes (approximately 2933 km) and from 68°7E to
97°25’E longitudes (approximately 3214 km). Cape Comorin (Kanyakumari) is the southernmost tip of the

E
Indian landmass. Indira Point, situated in the Nicobar Island, constitutes the southernmost point of the Indian
1
Union. The country lies in the northern and eastern hemisphere. The Tropic of Cancer [ 23 °N latitude] passes

L
2
through the centre of the country, dividing the country into two halves. The tropical zone lies to the south of the
Tropic of Cancer, whereas the temperate zone lies in the north. I passes through the states of Gujarat, Rajasthan,

L
1
Madhya Pradesh, Chattisgarh, Jharkhand, West Bengal, Trippura and Mizoram. The 82 °E longitude, passing
2
near Allahabad, is the Central Meridian of India.

A
The Indian Standard Time is bases on the time of this longitude.

India’a neighbour countries are China, Nepal and Bhutan i the north; Myanmar and Bangladesh in the east;
Pakistan in the northwest; and Sri Lanka across the Palk Strait and Gulf of Mannar in the south. The Arabian
sea lies to the west of the Indian peninsula, the Bay of Bengal is n the eat and the Indian Ocean is to the south
of India. The island such as Andaman and Nicobar Island in the Bay of Bengal and Lakshadweep in the Arabian
Sea are also part of the Indian territory. The total length of the coastline in India, the island, is 7500 km.

India’s location at the head of the Indian Ocean is strategically very significant. India commands the sea routes
between Europe and Africa on one hand and Southeast Asia, far East and Australia on the other. The opening
of the suez Canal in 1869 has significantly reduced the distance between India and Europe.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

People of India can be divided into five ethnic groups, namely Proto-Australoids, Negritos, Mongoloids,
Mediterraneans or Dravidians and Vedic Aryans.

India is a union of 28 states and 6 union territories. Delhi is the National Capital, having a special status. In
terms of area, Rajasthan is the largest state of India, and Goa is ths smallest state.

65
Class X ALLEN
INDIA-SIZE AND LOCATION EXERCISE
1. Match the following: 11. The group of islands that is a part of India, lies in
State Neighbouring Country the Bay of Bengal is
A. Uttaranchal i. Myanmar (1) Maldives
(2) Andaman and Nicobar islands
B. Rajasthan ii. Pakistan
(3) Lakshadweep
C. Meghalaya iii. China
(4) Sri Lanka
D. Nagaland iv. Bangladesh
12. One of the ancient civilizations in the world is
(1) A-iv, B-iii, C-ii, D-i (2) A-iii, B-ii, C-iv, D-i
(1) India (2) Pakistan
(3) A-i, B-iii, C-ii, D-iv (4) A-ii, B-iv, C-i, D-iii
(3) Bangladesh (4) Nepal
2. A major latitude dividing Indian mainland into two
13. The water body located to the west of India is the
equal halves is
(1) Arabain Sea (2) Bay of Bengal
(1) Arctic circle (2) Equator
(3) Caspian Sea (4) Dead Sea
(3) Tropic of Capricorn (4) Tropic of Cancer
14. The difference between the duration of day and

N
3. India shares longest international boundary with night is hardly felt at Kanyakumari but not so at
(1) China (2) Nepal Kashmir. Why ?
(3) Pakistan (4) Bangladesh (1) Because Kashmir is a cold place.

E
4. Maldive Islands are situated to the south of the (2) Because Kashmir comes under the shadow of
(1) Port Blair (2) Ross Island the Himalayan Mountains.
(3) Because sunlight is reflected off the sea water

L
(3) Nicobar Island (4) Lakshadweep Island
around Kanyakumari.
5. India is separated from Sri Lanka by
(4) Because Kanyakumari is nearer to the
(1) Arabian Sea (2) Gulf of Kutchh

L
Equator than Kashmir.
(3) Indian ocean (4) Palk Strait 15. The southernmost point of Indian main land is
6. India’s mainland extension lies between: known as
(1) 8° 4’ N-37° 6’ N latitudes 68° 7’ E – 97° 25’ E (1) Kanyakumari (2) Indira Point

A
longitude (3) Pondicherry (4) Cochin
(2) 8° 3’ N-38° 5’ N latitudes 65° 5’ E – 97° 21’ E 16. The most recently formed state of India is
longitude (1) Jharkhand (2) Telangana
(3) 7° 9’ N-37° 5’ N latitudes 65° 5’ E – 97° 21’ E (3) Chattisgarh (4) Uttaranchal
longitude 17. Drass is the
(4) 8° 4’ N-37° 6’ N latitudes 69° 7’ E – 97° 24’ E (1) Wettest place in India (2) driest place in India
longitude (3) hottest place in India (4) coldest place in India
7. The total number of union territories on Western 18. The eastern most state of India is
and Eastern coast are : (1) Arunachal Pradesh (2) Manipur
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

(1) 2 (2) 3 (3) Mizoram (4) Nagaland


(3) 1 (4) 7 19. Smallest state in India is
8. An example of Union Territory is (1) Goa (2) Kerela
(1) Haryana (2) Punjab (3) Mizoram (4) Sikkim
(3) Chandigarh (4) Kerala 20. In which year ‘Indira Point’ submerged under the
9. Suez Canal has reduced India’s distance from Eu- sea water
rope by (1) 2000 (2) 2002
(1) 6,000 km (2) 7,000 km (3) 1998 (4) 2004
(3) 8,000 km (4) 9,000 km 21. India’s total area accounts______ per cent of the
10. The water body to the east of India is geographical area of the world.
(1) Arabian Sea (2) Bay of Bengal (1) 5.0 (2) 4.0
(3) Dead Sea (4) Caspian Sea (3) 238 (4) 2.4

66
ALLEN Social Science
22. Which state of India does not have common bound- 34. Which country among the India's neighbours is the
ary with Myanmar ? smallest?
(1) Arunachal Pradesh (2) Tripura (1) Nepal (2) Bhutan
(3) Nagaland (4) Manipur
(3) Sri Lanka (4) Bangladesh
23. Which of the following countries is not in Indian sub-
continent ? 35. How many states and Union Territories does India
have?
(1) Maldives (2) Pakistan
(3) Bangladesh (4) Nepal (1) India has 26 States and 7 Union Territories
24. Areawise what is the position of India in the world (2) India has 25 States and 7 Union Territories
(1) Third (2) Fourth (3) India has 29 States and 7 Union Territories
(3) Sixth (4) Seventh (4) India has 28 States and 6 Union Territories
25. Tropic of Cancer passes through which of these
36. The imaginary longitude that divides India into two
states
(1) Orissa (2) Tripura (1) Tropic of Capricorn

N
(3) Bihar (4) Punjab (2) Prime Meridian
26. Which one of the following is the southern-most Lati- (3) Equator
tude of India?

E
(4) Indian Standard Meridian
(1) 8° 4’ North (2) 8° 4’ South
37. Which one of the following routes are the oldest
(3) 6° 4’ South (4) 6° 4’ North
and provided India relationships with other

L
27. The latitudinal extent of mainland of India lies between
countries?
(1) 7° 5’ N and 26° 5’ N
(1) Land routes (2) Sea routes
(2) 8° 4’ N and 37° 6’ N

L
(3) Air routes (4) Rail routes
(3) 12° 5’ N and 27° 5’ N
(4) 12° 5’ N and 37° 6’ N 38. India has land boundary of about
28. The Tropic of Cancer does not pass through (1) 18,200 km (2) 7516.6 km

A
(1) Rajasthan (2) Tripura (3) 15,200 km (4) 2458 km
(3) Jharkhand (4) Bihar 39. The Princely states and Provinces were two types of
29. Which meridian is fixed as a Standard Meridian of
(1) districts in India
India?
(1) 82½
°E (2) 84½
°E (2) Administrative divisions in India. (During the
British Period)
(3) 86° E (4) 81° E
30. The easternmost longitude of India is : (3) cities in India
(1) 97° 25’ E (2) 77° 6’ E (4) towns in India
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

(3) 68° 7’ E (4) 82° 32’ E 40. Which neighbouring country would you reach if you
31. The number of states in India which have coastal were to sail across the Palk Strait?
line is
(1) Myanmar (2) Maldives
(1) 5 (2) 7
(3) Bangladesh (4) Sri Lanka
(3) 9 (4) 11
41. The neighbouring countries that share their bound-
32. Daman and Diu is a
aries with India are :
(1) union territory of India (2) state of India
(1) Pakistan and Afghanistan
(3) district of India (4) city of India
(2) Myanmar and Bangladesh
33. Western most point in India is
(1) Rajasthan (2) Gir range (3) China and Nepal
(3) Ghuar Mota (4) Lakhpal (4) All the above

67
Class X ALLEN
42. Which one of the following Indian states does not 44. The western-most Union Territory of India is
share its boundary with Pakistan?
(1) Lakshwadeep
(1) Jammu and Kashmir (2) Rajasthan
(2) Daman and Diu
(3) Gujarat (4) Haryana
(3) Puducherry
43. A narrow channel of sea separating two land-masses
(4) Dadar and Nagar Haveli
is called :
45. Which of the following states does not share any
(1) Gulf (2) Strait international boundary?
(3) Isthmus (4) Bay (1) Rajasthan (2) West Bengal
(3) Uttarakhand (4) Madhya Pradesh

E N
L L
A CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 2 4 4 4 4 1 2 3 2 2 2 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 1 4
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. 4 2 1 4 2 3 2 4 1 1 3 1 3 2 3 4 1 3 2 4
Que. 41 42 43 44 45
Ans. 4 4 2 2 4

68
ALLEN Social Science
15. PHYSICAL DIVISIONS OF INDIA
n Northern Mountains
The fold mountain system in the extra-peninsular part of India consists of the Himalayas and the northeastern
hilly regions. The plate tectonic theory explains the formation of the Himalayan mountains. The earth’s crust is
fragmented into tectonic plates by convection currents originating from the earth’s interior. These currents are
formed due to the internal heating of the molten rocks under high pressure and temperature. The earth’s crust
consists of seven major plates such as the South American plate, North American plate, Pacific plate, Eurasian
plate, Indo-Australian plate, African plate and the Antarctic plate. There are about 40 minor plates. These
plates may move towards each other and collide along the convergent plate boundaries. Tectonic activities like
earthquakes and folding of the earth’crust occur along the boundaries of the colliding plates, resulting in the
formation of fold mountains. The Himalayas were formed by upliftment of the sediments of the Tethys sea a
several phase of the convergence of the Eurasian and Indo-Australian plates.
When two plates drift away from each other, these divergent plates result in the opening up of gap in between
them. The sea floors spread (as happened in the Atlantic Ocean), along with volcanic activities.

N
In ancient times, the earth’s surface consisted of a massive landmass called ‘Pangea’. The ancient sea, called
Panthalassa, surrounded the super-continent of Pangea. The northern part of the Pangea was known as the
‘Angara Land’, and the southern part was called ‘Gondwanaland’. Gondwanaland was fragmented into several

E
plates du to severe tectonic activities. These plates drifted apart to form South America, Antarctica, Southern
part of Africa (South Africa and Madagascar), Southern part of Asia (Arabia, Peninsular India and Malaya), and
Australia.

L
n Himalayas
The Himalayas extend from Kashmir in the west to Arunachal Pradesh in the east for a distance of 2400 km.

L
They form the highest mountain system of the world. The highest peak of the Himalayas is the Mount Everest
(8848 m) in Nepal. They are young fold mountains which orighinated from the Tethys sea by a series of
upliftments due to different stages of continental drift of the Gondwana landmass. The Himalaya are still unsta-

A
ble and prone to earthquakes. The Himalayas consist of three parallel ranges, each with characteristic orographic
features.
l Outer Himalayas or Siwaliks in the south: The Siwaliks are the foothills of the Himalayas. They were
formed by deposition of alluvium by the mountain streams which come down the slopes. They comprise a
series of parallel ridges and structural valleys, rising to maximum height of 1500 m. In between the parallel
ridges narrow plains called duns, e.g. Dehradun.
l Lesser Himalayas or Himachal in the middle : The Lesser Himalayas are situated in between the
Siwaliks in the south and Greater Himalayas in the north, rising to a maximum elevation of 4500-5000 m.
This range consists of parallel ranges, some of which are covered by snow. Important mountain ranges are
Pir Panjal, Dhauladhar, Mahabharat and Mussorrie ranges. Picturesque valleys such as the Kashmir valley,
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

Kulu valley, Kangra valley, Lahul valley are renowned for attracting tourists. Hill stations in these ranges are
Darjeeling, Shimla Ranikhet and Nainital.
l Greater Himalayas or Himadri in the north: The highest range of the Himalayas, with an average
altitude of 6000 m, the Himadri range extends from Nanga Parbat in the west to Namcha Barwa in the east.
These mountain randes rise above the limit of perpetual snow. The highest peak of the world, Mount Everest
(8848 m), is located in Nepal (known as Sagarmatha in Nepal). Kanchanjunga (8598 m), situated on this
range. K2 or Godwin Austin (8611 m) in the Karakoram Range is the highest in, Ganges and the Yamunotri
glaciers. The Gangotri glacier (the source of river the Shipki La, Jelep La and Nathu La on this range.
l North-eastern Hilly Region or Purvanchal : The hills and plateaus of Manipur, Nagaland, Mizora,
Trippura, Meghalaya, of the Greater Himalayas, with an average altitude of 2000-3000 m. The Patkari
Bum ranges, The Meghalaya Plateau is part of the Gondwana landmass. The Meghalaya Plateau consists of
the Garo, Khasi and Jaintia hills, on which is situated the Shillong plateau.
69
Class X ALLEN
l Importance of the Himalayas on the Economic Life of Indians
} Himalays intercept the Mosoon winds and cause rainful over the greater part of the country.
} Major nroth Indian rivers owe their origin to the glaciers of the high Himalaya.
} The vast Indo-Gangetic plains have been formed by the deposition of sediments brought down by the
Indus, Ganga, Brahmaputra and their innumerable tributaries.
} The Himalayan forests support a number of forest-based economic activities like timber trade.
} Development of tourism industry is a major economic activity in the Himalayas.
} Himalayas provide favourable terrain for development of hydro-electricity.
} Cultivation of orchard crops like apples and oranges and cultivation of crops like tea and saffron are the
major economic activities in the Himalayas.
} Many medicinal plants and herbs grow in these mountains.
n North Indian Plains
The great plains of North India, covering an area of 6,52,000 sq. km stretches in an east-west direction. They

N
are bordered by the Himalayas in the north and Central Indian Highlands in the south. These plains consist of
very rich and fertile alluvium deposited by many perennial rivers, such as Indus, Ganga, Brahmaputra and their
numerous tributaries. The plains form one of the largest agricultural belts in the world. The Northern Plains

E
provide suitable conditions for irrigation, inland navigation, constructing roads and railways. These have helped
in setting up industries. About 0 per cent of India’s population resides in the northern plains.
There are four sections of the plains.

L
l Ganga plains
} Upper Ganga plain – the land between the Ganga and Yamuna is called the Ganga – Yamuna doab

L
(meaning land between two rivers), which lies in Uttar Pradesh.
} Middle Ganga plain – plains of Bihar
} Lower Ganga plain – plains of West Bengal, ending at the Ganga delta in Sundarbans.

A
l Punjab plains :plains of Punjab of Punjab and Haryana, gradually merge with the Rajasthan plains.
l Rajasthan plains : Lying to the west of the Aravali Hills, the Rajasthan Plains consist of
} Rajasthan–Bager
} Marusthali–consisting of the Thar desert. Lunia is the only river of significance in this desert region. Sand
dunes are found on the dunes are found on the desert surface. The crescentshaped sand dunes are called
barchans.
l Brahmaputra valley : Known as the Assam valley. Peninsular Plateau is a part of the ancient
Gondwanaland. The northern part of the Peninsular Plateau, lying to the north of the Narmada river and
formed mainly by the Malwa Plateau, is known as the Central Indian Highlands. The Deccan Plateau lies in
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

the Indian peninsula.


n Central Indian Highlands
Wide tracts of hilly country separate the Great Plains of North India from the Peninsular Plateau and coastal
plains. The Central Indian Highlands and large tracts of rugged hills and plateaus, lying between the Aravalli
range in the west to the Bundelkhand and Baghelkhand upands in the east. Malwa Plateau and the Arayalli
range in the west to the Bundelkhand and Baghelkhand uplands in the east. Malwa Plateau and the Chotanagpur
Plateau are significant parts of these highlands. the Aravalli range forms the oldest fold mountain of the world.
Its highest peak is the Mount Guru Shikhar (1722 m). Mount Abu is a famous hill station. The east Rajasthan
Upland, Madhya Bharat Pathar and Vindhyan Uplands are other features of the Central Indian Highlands. The
Narmada and Tapi rivers arise from these highlands, and flow westaldn into the Arabian Sea through ancient rift
valleys. The Chambal River forms significant badland topography while flowing through the region. Much of the
area remains forested.

70
ALLEN Social Science
n Deccan Plateau
The Deccan Plateau is bordered by the Satupra–Mahadeo–Maikal ranges and Rajmahal hills in the north,
Eastern Ghats in the east and Western Ghats in the west. They are part of Gondwanaland landmass and
comprise ancient crystalline Pre-Cambrian rocks. The northwestern part of the Deccan Plateau is covered by
blastic rocks. Due to differential weathering and erosion, the basaltic rocks have formed flat-topped hills with
steep escarpments which descend down in step-like formation towards the east. This is called the ‘Deccan Trap’
(Trap meaning steps) and covers almost entirely the state of Maharashtra. The soil is black in colour and is very
important for the cultivation of cotton. The Narmadd and Tapti rivers flow through rift valleys along the northern
boundary of the penisular plateau. The Western Ghats, called Sahyadris, border the western border of the
peninsular plateau. Kalsubai is the higher peak of the Western Ghats. The Western Ghats are almost continuous
with only three passes or gaps which interrupt their continuity. They are the Thal Ghat and Bhor Ghat passes in
Maharashra, and the Pal Ghat gap in Kerala, The Eastern Ghats, called Malayadris, border the eastern part of
the peninsular plateau. They are not as continuous as the Western Ghats and are dissected by the major east-
flowing rivers like Mahanadi, Godavari, Krishna and Cauvery. Mahendragiri is a major peak. The Western
Ghats meet the Eastern Ghats in the Nilgirl hills, which continues southwards as the Annalmalal range, Cardamon
and Palani hills, Dodda Betta is the highest peak of the Nilgiris. Anaimudi in the Annalmalal range is the highest

N
peak of South India. Hill stations in the Western Ghats are Mahabaleshwar and Matheran. Ootty (Ootacamund)
in the Nilgiri hills, Pachmarhi in the Mahadeo hills are also famous.
The peninsular plateau is economically important as

E
l There are rich deposits of various mineral resources.
l The rivers coming along the edge of the plateaus form waterfalls. This helps in the generation of hydro-
electric power.

L
l The soil is suitable for cultivation of cotton.
l The dense forests have rich wildlife.

L
n Coastal plains
India’s coastline extends from the Kutch in Gujarat in the west to the Gangetic delta in the east.
The Western coastal plain lies between the Western Ghats and Arabian Sea. It extends from Gulf of is 1500 km.
The subdivisions of the Western coastal plain are the Kutch and Kathiawar peninsulas and the Gujarat coatal

A
plain (in Gujarat), Konkan coastal plain (in Maharashra and Goa), Karnataka coastal plain (in Karnataka) and
Malabar coastal plain (in Kerala). The Malabar coastal plain is the widest part of the western coast, made up of
extremely fertile alluvial soil and has a number of lagoons and backwaters like Asthamudi and Vembanad. The
western coast receives heavy rainfall from the south-west monsoon winds.
The Eastern coastal plain extends from the Gangetic delta to Cape Comorin (Kanyakumari) and Mahanadi,
Godavari, Krishna and Kaveri. Some salt water lagoons and lakes are present, such as the Chilka Lake in
Odisha (lagoon in India) and Pulicat Lake in Tamil Nadu. The eastern coast is divided into the Coromondel Coast
in the south and Utkal coast in the north. The Northern Circars extend from the mouth of the river Subarnarekha
to the Krishna delta.
n Importance of the Coastal Regions of India
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

l Economic activities such as agriculture, trade, tourism, industrial development, fishing and salt making.
l Important hinterland for major parts like Kandla, Mumbai, Nhava-Sheva, Murmagao, Mangalore, Cochin,
Tuticorin, Chennai, Visakhapatnam, Paradeep, Haldia, Kolkata.
n Islands of India
There are 247 islands in India, out of which 204 islands are in the Bay of Bengal and the rest are in Arabin Sea
and Gulf of Mannar (between India and Sri Lanka).
The Andaman and Nicobar islands in the Bay of Bengal are crests of submerged fold mountains and are made
of hard volcanic rocks. The Andamans consist of three main islands–North, Middle and South Andamans,
collectively known as the Great Andamans. The Middle Andaman is the largest island of the Andamans. The
Nicobar group consists of 19 islands Great Nicobar is the largest amongst them. Indira Point, the southernmost
tip of India, is in the Greater Nicobar Island. Barren Island and Narcondam Island in this group are of volcanic
origin. The Barren Island volcano is an active volcano.
The islands of Arabian Sea ae formed of corals. Lakshadweep, Amindivi and Minicoy are the major islands.
Pamban Island is situated between India and Sri Lanka.
71
Class X ALLEN
PHYSICAL DIVISIONS OF INDIA EXERCISE
1. The Himalayan range also known as lesser 12. Which one of the following is the correct explana-
Himalayas is tion of the word, ‘Corals’ ?
(1) Himadri (2) Shivalik (1) They are group of islands
(3) Himachal (4) Hindukush (2) It is a Peninsula
2. The longest and the important range of the Lesser (3) Short living microorganism
Himalayas is
(4) They are rocks
(1) Mahabharat range (2) Pir Panjal range
13. The eastward extensions of the Peninsular plateau
(3) Zaskar range (4) Kailash range
are locally known as the
3. Laccadive, Minicoy and Amindive are together
known as the (1) Gondwanaland

(1) Lakshadweep (2) Malabar (2) Bundelkhand


(3) Kannad (4) Konkan (3) Malwa plateau
4. The old alluvium on the slightly elevated terraces is (4) Tibetan plateau

N
known as 14. The height of Doda Betta is
(1) bhangar (2) terai
(1) 2,695 meters (2) 2,637 meters

E
(3) khaddar (4) bhabar
(3) 1,501 meters (4) 2,680 meters
5. A place from where Brahmaputra enters India is
15. The region is famous for the Barchan or crescent
(1) Dihang (2) Nathula

L
shaped dunes is India is
(3) Digboi (4) Namcha Barwa
(1) Aravali range (2) Indian desert
6. A triangular landmass that lies to the south of the

L
(3) Northern Plains (4) Southern plains
river Narmada is known as
(1) Malwa 16. The only salt lakes of India are

(2) Chotanagpur plateau (1) Wular, Dal (2) Luni, Mahi

A
(3) Deccan plateau (3) Krishna, Kaveri (4) Chilka, Sambhar
(4) Meghalaya plateau 17. The Central Highlands and the Deccan plateau is a
7. Out of the following which mountain was formed first ? broad division of the
(1) Vindhyachal (2) Aravali (1) Peninsular plateau
(3) Satpura (4) Nilgiri (2) Northern plains
8. Satpura hills lie in which of the following states? (3) Coastal plains
(1) Uttar Pradesh (2) Bihar (4) Himalayan Mountains
(3) Malabar coast (4) Gujarat 18. The Dhaula Dhar range is in
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

9. Karbi-Anglong is located in the state of


(1) Himadri (2) Shiwaliks
(1) Manipur
(3) Nepal Himalayas (4) Himachal
(2) Mizoram
19. Mountain ranges in the eastern part of India forming
(3) Assam
boundary with Myanmar are collectively called as :
(4) Arunachal Pradesh
(1) Himachal (2) Purvanchal
10. The only bird sanctuary located in the Lakshadweep
Island in India is (3) Uttaranchal (4) Shiwalk

(1) Chilka (2) Pulicut 20. In the ancient times, all of the landmass was aggre-
gated together in the form of the super
(3) Pitti (4) Kollam
continent______.
11. A pass of Himalaya that lies in the state of Uttaranchal
(1) Tethys (2) Gondwanaland
(1) Kavaratti (2) Shipkila
(3) Pangea (4) Angaraland
(3) Bumla (4) Bondila
72
ALLEN Social Science
21. The only large river in the Indian Desert is the 26. Which islands of India are called Coral Islands?
(1) Narmada (2) Tapi (1) Lakshdeep
(3) Mahi (4) Luni (2) Andman and Nikobar

22. The part of the Himalayas lying between Satluj and (3) both (1) and (2)
Kali rivers is known as (4) None of these

(1) Kumaon Himalayas (2) Assam Himalayas 27. A narrow gap in a mountain range providing ac-
cess to the other side is :
(3) Punjab Himalayas (4) Kashmir Himalayas
(1) Mound (2) Pass
23. Ooty is also known as
(3) Strait (4) Valley
(1) Baghelkhand (2) Bundelkhand 28. The wet and swampy belt of the Northern Region
(3) Central Highlands (4) Udagamandalam is known locally as :
24. The new alluvium soil is called (1) Bhabar (2) Terai
(3) Doab (4) Bhangar
(1) bhangar (2) terai
29. Find the odd one out :

N
(3) Khadar (4) bhabar
(1) Kanchenjunga (2) Nanga Parbat
25. Which two hills are located in the south-east por-
(3) Namcha Barwa (4) Anai Mudi
tion of Eastern Ghats ?

E
30. The largest delta in the world is :
(1) Mizo Hills and Naga Hills (1) Ganga Delta
(2) Javadi Hills and Shevroy Hills (2) Mahanadi Delta

L
(3) Patkai Hills and Manipuri Hills (3) Sunderbans Delta
(4) Mizo Hills and Patkai Hills (4) Godavari

A L
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

ANSWER KEY
Q ue. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 3 2 1 1 4 3 2 1 2 3 2 3 2 2 2 4 1 4 2 3
Q ue. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. 4 1 4 3 2 1 2 2 4 3

73
Class X ALLEN
16. DRAINAGE
Drainage describes the river system of an area.
The area drained by a single system is called a drainage basin.

Any elevated area, such as a mountain or an upland, which seperates two drainage basins is known as a water
divide.
n Drainage System in India
The Indian rivers are divided into two major groups :
l The Himalayan rivers

l The Peninsular rivers


l The Himalayan Rivers : A river alongwith its tributaries may be called a river system.
} The Indus River System Rises in Tibet, near Lake Mansarowar.

N
Tributaries in Mountains - Zaskar, Nubra, Shyok and the Hunza
Tributaries in Plains - Satluj, Beas, Ravi, Chenab and the Jhelum

E
Total length - 2900 km, reaches the Arabian Sea, east of Karachi.

} The Ganga River System : Bhagirathi joins Alaknanda at Devprayag to form Ganga.

L
Tributaries from Himalayas - Yamuna, Ghaghara, Gandak and Kosi

Tributaries from Peninsula - Chanbal, Betwa and Son

L
The Ganga flows eastwards till Farakka in West Bengal, here it bifurcates ; the Bhagirathi - Hooghly, is
joined by Brahmaputra, flows into the Bay of Bengal

A
Length of Ganga is over 2500 km, plains stretch over nearly 1800 km

} The Brahmaputra River System : Rises in Tibet-east of Mansarowar lake.

Enters Indian Arunachal Pradesh through a gorge (Namcha Barwa), known by the name of Dihang,
joined by Dibang, Lohit Kenula to form Brahmaputra in Assam.

l The Peninsular Rivers


} The Narmada Basin
Rises in the Amarkantak hills in Madhya Pradesh

The ‘Marble rocks’ and the ‘Dhuadhar falls’ are some of the notable features.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

Narmada basin covers parts of Madhya pradesh and Gujarat and finally falls into Arabian Sea.
} The Tapi Basin

Rises in the Satpura ranges, in the Betual district of Madhya Pradesh


Basin covers parts of Madhya Pradesh, Gujarat and Maharashtra, finally falls in Arabian Sea.

} The Godavari Basin - Largest peninsular river, rises from the slopes of Western Ghats in the Nashik
district of Maharashtra, Madhya Pradesh, Orissa and Andhra Pradesh.

Tributaries - Purna, Wardha, Pranhita, Manjra, Wainganga and the Penganga.


} The Mahandi Basin - Rises in the highlands of Chattisgarh, length about 830 km, drainage basin in
Maharashtra, Chattisgarh, Jharkhand and Orissa.

74
ALLEN Social Science
} The Krishna Basin - Rises from a spring near Mahabaleshwar, about 1400 km, reaches the Bay of
Bengal Tributaries - Tungabhadra, Koyana, Ghatprabha, Musi and the Bhima

Drainage basin is in Maharashtra, Karnataka and Andhra Pradesh.


} The Kaveri basin - Rises in the Brahmagri range of the Western Ghats and reaches Bay of Bengal,
length -760 km.
Tributaries - Amravati, Bhavani, Hemavati and Kabini

Drains parts of Karnataka, Kerala and Tamil Nadu

l Lakes

} Permanent and Seasonal Lakes

} Fresh water and Salty water lakes

} Natural and Man made lakes

N
Importance of Lakes for Human beings.

n Rivers

E
There are four groups of rivers which flow through Odisha into the Bay of Bengal. They are:

} Rivers that have a source outside the State (the Subarnarekha, the Brahmani the IB and the Mahanadi).

L
} Rivers having a source inside the State (the Budhabalanga, the Baitarani, the Salandi, and the Rushikulya).

} Rivers having a source inside the Odisha, but flow through other states (the Bahuda, the Vamsadhara

L
River, and theNagavali River).

} Rivers having a source inside Odisha, but tributary to rivers which flow through other states (the Machkund,

A
the Sileru River, the Kolab, and the Indravati River).
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

75
Class X ALLEN
DRAINAGE EXERCISE
1. Which one of the following is the correct sequence 12. The Ganga River is fed by
of rivers of India from north to south ? (1) Yamunotri glacier (2) Siachen glacier
A. Godavari B. The Ganga (3) Gangotri glacier (4) Baltoro glacier
C. Narmada D. Cauvery 13. Ganga emerges from the mountains into the plains at
(1) B,C,A,D (2) D,B,C,A (1) Badrinath (2) Gangotri
(3) A,C,B,D (4) D,A,C,B (3) Haridwar (4) Rishikesh
2. Which one out of the following rivers does not enter 14. A river joined by its tributaries, at approximately
Ganga on its northern side. right angles forms
(1) Chambal (2) Gomti (1) trellis pattern (2) dendritic pattern
(3) Ghaghra (4) Kosi (3) radial pattern (4) rectangular pattern
3. In India which of the following river forms the sec- 15. A natural fresh water lake in India is
ond biggest waterfall?

N
(1) Dal lake
(1) Narmada (2) Godavari
(2) Gobind Sagar
(3) Kaveri (4) Krishna
(3) Indira Gandhi Reservior

E
4. _____drainage pattern develops where hard and
(4) Hussain sagar
soft rocks exist parallel to each other.
16. The Sundarban Delta derived its name from the
(1) Dendritic (2) Rectangular

L
(1) pine tree (2) sundari tree
(3) Trellis (4) Radial
(3) peepal tree (4) sal tree
5. Majuli, the largest inhabited riverine island is found

L
in the ______ river. 17. The Bhakra Nangal hydel power project has led to
(1) Ganga (2) Brahmaputra the formation of

(3) Sutlej (4) Yamuna (1) Gandhi Sagar lake

A
6. Rajasamand lake is in the Indian province of (2) Bhimtal lake

(1) Chhattisgarh (2) Jharkhand (3) Guru Gobind Sagar lake

(3) Rajasthan (4) Uttarakhand (4) Barapani lake

7. River known as Dakshin Ganga is 18. One of the main habitats of Royal Bengal Tiger in
India is
(1) River Krishna (2) River Mahanadi
(1) Sunderban delta (2) Indus delta
(3) River Kaveri (4) River Godavari
(3) Godavari delta (4) Kaveri delta
8. The length of Godavari is
19. The largest peninsular river is
(1) 1000 km (2) 1200 km
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

(1) Narmada (2) Godavari


(3) 1400 km (4) 1500 km
(3) Mahanadi (4) Krishna
9. The river that is known as the “Sorrow of Bihar” is
20. Wainganga and Penganga are the tributaries of
(1) Kosi (2) Mahandi
(1) Godavari river (2) Tapi river
(3) Godavari (4) Krishna
(3) Narmada river (4) Krishna river
10. The way in which tributaries and rivers branch in
different directions is known as 21. Loktak lake is located in the state of
(1) water divide (2) drainage basin (1) Mizoram (2) Manipur
(3) river syatem (4) drainage pattern (3) Meghalaya (4) Maharashtra
11. Kolleru Lake is located in the state of 22. River Yamuna rises in the
(1) Arunachal Pradesh (2) Uttar Pradesh (1) Gangotri glacier (2) Siachen glacier
(3) Madhya Pradesh (4) Andhra Pradesh (3) Baltoro glacier (4) Yamunotri glacier

76
ALLEN Social Science
23. The term ‘drainage’ describes the 33. Which one of the following statements about the
(1) sewer system of an area river Narmada is not true ?
(1) It flows through a rift velly
(2) river system of an area
(2) It flows through a gorge near Jabalpur
(3) water supply system of an area
(3) It plunges over steep rocks at the Dhuadhar
(4) tank system of an area falls
24. A river that is NOT the tributary of the river Ganga is (4) Its tributaries are Tungabhadra and Musi
(1) Betwa (2) Yamuna 34. Which among the following tributaries of Ganga
(3) Son (4) Beas came from the peninsular uplands ?
25. Delta formed by Ganga-Brahmaputra in India is (1) Gandak (2) Kosi
(1) Sundri delta (2) Sunderban delta (3) Ghaghara (4) Son
35. Which one of the following drainage patterns
(3) Changrabhaga delta (4) Sansa delta
develop on a strongly jointed rocky terrain ?
26. Which place is located on the water divide be-
(1) Radial (2) Centrifugal
tween the Indus and the Ganga river system ?
(3) Trellis (4) Rectangular

N
(1) Ambala (2) Nainital
36. What is the name of the Brahamputra river in
(3) Haridwar (4) Allahabad Bangladesh?
27. At which place do the Satluj, Beas, Ravi, Chenab (1) Jamuna (2) Dibang

E
and the Jhelum rivers goin together with Indus ? (3) Lohit (4) Ravi
(1) Ambala (2) Mithankot 37. Which river of peninsular India is the longest?

L
(3) Pathankot (4) Haridwar (1) Kaveri (2) Godavari
28. In which of the following states is Sambhar Lake (3) Mahanadi (4) Krishna
situated ?

L
38. What is an area drained by a single river system
(1) Rajasthan (2) Uttar Pradesh called?
(3) Bihar (4) Jammu and Kashmir (1) Drainage basin (2) Water divide
(3) Drainage (4) Doab

A
29. Which one of the following lakes differs from the
rest in the group? 39. Which river in the following does not make a Delta?
(1) Narmada (2) Kaveri
(1) The Dal lake
(3) Godavari (4) Mahanadi
(2) The Nainital Lake
40. Which one of the following rivers flows towards the
(3) The Guru Gobind Sagar
west in a rift valley ?
(4) The Bhimtal Lake (1) Godavari (2) Narmada
30. Which of the two states does river Kaveri does not (3) Kaveri (4) Krishna
pass through ?
41. Sivasamudram, the second biggest waterfall of In-
(1) Kerala and Karnataka dia is made by which river :
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

(2) Karnataka and Tamil Nadu (1) Krishna (2) Kaveri


(3) Kerala and Tamil Nadu (3) Godavari (4) Mahanadi
(4) Andhra Pradesh and Tamil Nadu 42. The river Indus originates in :
31. The River Mahanadi rises from which one of the (1) Nepal (2) Bhutan
following states ? (3) Tibet (4) Bangladesh
(1) Madhya Pradesh (2) Chhattisgarh 43. Which of these is a freshwater lake of India?
(3) Jharkhand (4) West Bengal (1) Sambhar (2) Wular
32. Which of the following cities is located at the (3) Chilika (4) Pulicat
confluence of Ganga and Yamuna ? 44. Which of the following is not a tributary of Godavari?
(1) Kanpur (2) Delhi (1) Purna (2) Wardha
(3) Patna (4) Allahabad (3) Wainganga (4) Lohit

77
Class X ALLEN
45. Meanders are formed in which one of the following 48. Alaknanda and Bhagirathi converge to be called as
courses of a river? Ganga at :
(1) Upper course (1) Haridwar (2) Kedarnath
(2) Middle course (3) Badrinath (4) Devprayag

(3) Lower course 49. Which one of the following drainage patterns does
the Ganga river form?
(4) Both upper and middle
(1) The Trellis Pattern
46. Which one of the following is a southern tributary
(2) The Radial Pattern
of the Ganga?
(3) The Dendritic Pattern
(1) Ghaggar (2) Son
(4) The Rectangular Pattern
(3) Gomti (4) Gandak
50. Which one of the following rivers has the largest
47. The Brahmaputra (Tsangpo) river rises in : drainage pattern in India?
(1) Sikkim (2) Tibet (1) The Indus (2) The Ganga
(3) Bhutan (4) Nepal (3) The Brahamaputra (4) The Mahanadi

E N
L L
A CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 1 1 3 3 2 3 4 4 1 4 4 3 3 1 1 2 3 1 2 1
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans. 2 4 2 4 2 1 2 1 3 4 2 4 4 4 4 1 2 1 1 2
Que. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans. 2 3 2 4 2 2 2 4 3 2

78
ALLEN Social Science

17. CLIMATE

n Climate
Refers to the sum total of weather conditions and variations over a large area for a long period of time
n Weather
Refers to state of the atmosphere over an area at any point of time
The climate of India is described as the ‘monsoon’ type. This type of climate is found mainly in the south and
Southeast Asia.
Despite an overall unity in the general pattern there are perceptible regional variations in climatic conditions
with in the country.
n Climatic Controls
There are six major controls of the climate of any place. They are latitude, altitude, pressure and wind system,
distance from the sea, ocean currents and relief features.

N
n Factors Affecting India’s Climate
l Latitude

E
l Altitude
l Pressure and Winds

L
n Jet Stream
These are a narrow belt of high altitude westerly winds in the troposphere. Their speed varies from about 110

L
km/h in summer to about 184 km/h in winter
} Subtropical westerly jet streams
} Tropical easterly jet streams

A
n The Indian Monsoon
Facts important for understanding the mechanism of the monsoons -
} The differential heating and cooling of land and water
} The shift of the position of lnter Tropical Convergence Zone
} The presence of the high-presure area, east of Madagascar
} Tibetan plateau gets intensely heated
} Movement of the westerly jet stream to the north of the Himalayas and the presence of the tropical
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

easterly jet stream over the Indian peninsula.


n Southern Oscillation
Changes in the pressure conditions over the southern oceans also affect the monsoons. Normally when the
tropical eastern south Pacific Ocean experiences high pressure, the tropical eastern Indian ocean eastern
Pacific has lower pressure in comparison to the eastern Indian ocean. This periodic change in pressure condi-
tions is known as Southern Oscillation.
n The onset of the monsoon and withdrawl
Onset of the Monsoon
The monsoon arrives at the southern tip of the Indian peninsula generally by the first week of June, Around the
time of its arrival, the normal rainfall increases suddenly and continues constantly for several days. This is known
as the ‘burst’ of the monsoon

79
Class X ALLEN
l Arabian Sea Branch
} Entering from the Western Ghats
} Entering from the Rann of Kuchchh
l Bay of Bengal Branch
} Entering into the North-east region
} Entering into the Ganga Valley region.
n Withdrawl of the Monsoon
Begins in the northwestern states of India by early September. By mid-October, it withdraws completely from
the northern half of the peninsula.
n The Seasons

l The Cold Weather Season : The cold weather season begins from mid-November in northern India and
stays till February. December and January are the coldest months in the northern part of India. The tem-

N
perature decreases as one moves from south to the north. Days are warm and the nights are cold. Frost is
common in the north and the higher slopes of the Himalayas experience snowfall. The northeast trade winds

E
prevail over the country. They blow from land to sea and hence, for most part of the country, it is a dry
season. In the northern part of the country a feeble high-pressure region develops, with light winds moving
outwards from this area. The weather is normally marked by clear sky, low temperatures and low humidity

L
and feeble variable winds.

l The Hot Weather Season : Due to the apparent movement of the sun, the global heat belt shifts north-

L
ward. As such from March to May, it is hot weather season in India. Temperature increases from south to
north. In peninsular India, temperature remains lower. High temperature between 38° C and 48° C in the
plains. Local dust storms accompanied with light rains. Hot dry winds, ‘loo’ is common in May and June.

A
Kerala and Karnatake coast receive pre-monsoon showers (Mango showers). West Bengal and Assam are
affected by northwesterly winds, (Kalbaisakhi).

l Advancing Monsoon : By early June, the low-pressure condition over the northern plains intensifies which
attracts the trade winds of the southern hemisphere. These winds cross the equator and blow in south
westerly direction entering the Indian peninsula as the south-west monsoon.

Monsoon has a tendency to have ‘breaks’ in rainfall. It has wet and dry spells. The monsoon rains take place
only for a few days at a time. They are interspersed with rainless intervals. These breaks in monsoon are
related to the movement of the monsoon trough.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

The monsoon is known for its uncertainties. The alternation of dry and wet spells vary in intensity, frequency
and duration.

l Retreating Monsoon : During October-November, with the apparent movement of the sun towards the
south, the monsoon trough or the low-pressure trough over the northern plains becomes weaker. This is
gradually replaced by a high-pressure system. The south west monsoon winds weaken and start withdrawing
gradually. By the beginning of October, the monsoon withdraws from the Northern Plains.

Owing to the conditions of high temperature and humidity, the weather becomes rather oppressive during
the day. This is commonly known as ‘October heat.’

The low-presure conditions, over north-western India, get transferred to the Bay of Bengal by early Novem-
ber. This shift is associated with the occurrence of cyclonic depressions, which originate over the Andaman
Sea.

80
ALLEN Social Science
l Distribution of Rainfall : The western coast and northeastern India receive over about 400 cm of rainfall
annually, it is less than 60 cm in western Rajasthan and adjoining part of Gujarat, Haryana and Punjab.
Rainfall is equally low in the interior of the Deccan plateau and east of the Sahyadris. A third area of low
precipitation is around Leh in Jammu and Kashmir. The rest of the country receives moderate rainfall.
l Monsoon as a Unifying Bond : There is great diversity in the climatic conditions due to location, extent
and relief features. But these diversities are subdued by the monsoons. These monsoons are active for just
three to four months and rest of the year India remains almost thirsty. This water scarcity is felt all over the
country. Thus the arrival of the monsoon is most welcome, it changes the Indian landscape, gives impetus to
agricultural activities, the total life of the Indian people revolves around the monsoons, including festivals.

E N
L L
A
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

81
Class X ALLEN
CLIMATE EXERCISE
1. EL-Nino is 10. Jet streams located approximately over 27°-30°
(1) warm current north latitude, is known as
(2) reversal of wind (1) easterly jet stream
(3) broad trough of low pressure (2) subtropical westerly jet streams
(4) wind of upper atmosphere (3) north-westerly jet streams
2. The phenomenon of continuous rainfall and increase (4) south-easterly jet streams
in rain is particularly known as 11. When gentle winds scrape across the ocean surface
(1) burst (2) hail (1) clouds are formed
(3) thundering (4) pre-shower (2) glaciers are formed
3. An apparent force caused by the earth’s rotation is (3) waves are formed
called
(4) mountains are formed
(1) gravitational force
12. Climate of India is greatly influenced by

N
(2) magnetic force
(1) monsoon winds (2) westerlies
(3) coriolis force
(3) easterlies (4) north-western winds
(4) centripetal force
13. When winds move back from the mainland to the

E
4. The factor responsible for the rainfall in months of Bay of Bengal, it is known as
winter in northern India is
(1) the burst of monsoon

L
(1) Tropical easterly jets
(2) retreating monsoon
(2) Tropical westerly jets
(3) pre-monsoon showers
(3) Western cyclonic disturbances

L
(4) mango showers
(4) Trade winds
14. The direction of the Bay of Bengal branch of
5. The place that receives highest rainfall in the world is southwest monsoon is
(1) Silchar (2) Cherrapunji

A
(1) southeast (2) southwest
(3) Mawsynram (4) Guwahati (3) northwest (4) northeast
6. Cyclones in Orrisa is due to depression over 15. The season that is marked by the onset and advance
(1) Bay of Bengal (2) Arabain Sea of monsoon is known as
(3) Indian Ocean (4) Andaman Sea (1) cold weather season
7. The ‘Mahawatr’ or local winter rainfall is significant (2) hot weather season
for (3) the season of retreating monsson
(1) Kharif crop (2) Rabi crop (4) south west monsoon seasson
(3) Mango cultivation (4) Zaid crop 16. Day and night temperature is almost equal in
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

8. Main cause behind peninsular India not having well (1) Uttar Pradesh
defined cold season is
(2) Andaman and Nicobar
(1) Monsoon
(3) Chandigarh
(2) low pressure
(4) Rajasthan
(3) moderate sea weather
17. Annual rainfall in the Western Coast and northeast-
(4) high pressure ern India is over
9. One of the factors influencing climate of any place is (1) 500cms (2) 600cms
(1) human beings (3) 800cms (4) 400cms
(2) ocean currents 18. The word ‘mausim’ is derived from
(3) light (1) Greek language (2) Latin language
(4) soil (3) Arabic language (4) English language

82
ALLEN Social Science
19. The south west monsoons start retreating from north 25. Bengal, Orissa and Andhra Pradesh coasts are fre-
to south in winter in India. The phenomenon involved quented by cyclones because
in this is : (1) The level coastline makes the cyclones penetrate
(1) Winds blow from hot regions to cold regions. these areas earlier
(2) Monsoons always move downwards. (2) These areas are close to a volcano
(3) Winds blow from a high pressure area to a low (3) Low pressure conditions in northwest India
pressure area lead to the creation of depression over
(4) Wind blow from the a low pressure area to a Andaman sea.
high pressure area (4) Heavy rainfall in these parts encourage strong
20. Which one of the following causes rainfall during wind conditions
winter in the north-western part of India ? 26. Mango showers occur in which one of the following
(1) Cyclonic depression (2) Western disturbances group of two states?
(3) Retreating monsson (4) South west monsoon (1) Bihar and West Bengal
21. Winter rainfall is very important for the cultivation of (2) Tamil Nadu and Andhra Pradesh

N
(1) zaid crop (2) kharif crop (3) Karnataka and Kerala
(3) rabi crop (4) commercial crop (4) Maharashtra and Andhra Pradesh
27. Which is the coldest place in India?

E
22. In peninsular India, temperature is generally low due
to (1) Drass (2) Srinagar
(1) latitude (3) Shillong (4) Bikaner

L
(2) the moderating influence of oceans 28. Which area is not an area of low precipitation?
(3) relief features (1) Western Rajasthan and Gujarat

L
(4) ocean currents (2) Leh in Jammu and Kashmir
23. In which month the transition season changes (3) Deccan plateau
the hot rainy season to dry winter season? (4) Assam

A
(1) December to February 29. In winter the western cyclonic disturbances origi-
(2) February to March nate from which sea?
(3) June to July (1) Mediterranean Sea (2) Indian Ocean
(4) October to November (3) Caspian Sea (4) Arabian Sea
24. Kal Baisakhi is associated with 30. Which one of the following states suffers from loo?
(1) Punjab (2) Kashmir (1) Tamil Nadu (2) Uttar Pradesh
(3) Karnataka (4) Bengal (3) Gujarat (4) None of these
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

ANSWER KEY
Q ue. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 1 1 3 3 3 4 2 3 2 2 3 1 2 2 4 2 4 3 3 2
Q ue. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. 3 2 4 4 3 3 1 4 1 3

83
Class X ALLEN
18. NATURAL VEGETATION AND WILD LIFE
n Concepts
l With over 47, 000 plant species, India, occupies tenth place in the world and fourth in Asia in plant diversity.
l India has 89,000 species of animals as well as a rich variety of fish in its fresh and marine waters.
l Plant community which grows naturally with no human help and its not disturbed by humans for a long time
is termed as natural vegetation.
l Virgin vegetation which are purely Indian are known as endemic species and those which have come from
outside India are termed as exotic plants.
n Relief
l The nature of land influences the type of vegetation.
l Different types of soils provide basis for different types of vegetation.
n Climate

N
l The character and extent of vegetation are mainly determined by temperature with humidity in the air,
precipitation and soil.

E
l Period of exposure to sunlight varies for different plants leading to their different rates of growth.
l Areas of heavy rainfall have more dense vegetation as compared to other areas of less rainfall.

L
l Forests are renewable resources and play a major role in enchancing the quality of the environment.
l Vegetion in most parts of India has been modified at some places, or replaced or degraded by human

L
occupancy.
n Ecosystem
l All the plants and animals in an area are interdependent and interrelated to each other in their physical

A
environment, thus forming an ecosystem
l A very large ecosystem on land having distinct type of vegetation and animal life is called a biome.
n Types of Vegetation
l The major types of vegetation in India are Tropical Rainforests, Tropical Deciduous Forests, Tropical Thorn
Forests and Scrubs, Montane Forests and Mangrove Forests.
l With warm and wet climate all year round the Tropical Rainforests have luxurious trees, shrubs and creepers.
l A large variety of animals are found in the rainforests.
l The most widespread forests of India – the Tropical Deciduous Forests – also known as the Monsoon Forests.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

l On the basis of the availability of water, these forests are further divided into moist and dry deciduous forests.
l The leaves of vegetation in Thorn Forests and Scrubs are mostly thick and small to minimise evaporation and
have succulent stems to conserve water.
l Montane forests have a succession of natural vegetation belts in the same order as we see from the tropical
to the Tundra region.
l Wet temperate forests are found between a height of 1000 and 2000 metres while temperate grasslands
are found at higher elevations.
l At 3600 metres above sea level temperate forests and grasslands give way to alpine vegetation.
l The mangrove tidal forests are found in the areas of coasts influenced by tides.
l Dense mangroves are the common varieties with roots of the plants submerged underwater.

84
ALLEN Social Science
n Wildlife

l India has more than 1200 species of birds, 2500 species of fish and between 5 to 8 per cent of the world’s
amphibians, reptiles and mammals.

l India is the only country in the world that has both tigers and lions.

l The Himalayas have a large range of animals that survive the bitter cold.

l Every species of animal has a role to play in the ecosytem; hence conservation is essential.

l Hunting and pollution is causing threat to animal species.

l To protect the flora and fauna of the country, the government has taken many steps.

l Fourteen biosphere reserves have been set up in the country to protect flora and fauna.

l 120 National Parks, 500 Wildlife Sanctuaries and 18 Biosphre Reserves have been set up to take care of
natural heritage.

E N
L L
A
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

85
Class X ALLEN
NATURAL VEGETATION AND WILD LIFE EXERCISE
1. The last remarry habitat of the Asiatic lion in the 10. Arid areas of Rann of Kachch and Thar desert is a
world is natural habitat for
(1) Gir forest in Gujarat (1) elephants
(2) Ranthambor in Rajasthan
(2) wild ass and camels
(3) Simlipal in Orissa
(3) one horned rhinoceros
(4) Rajaji in Uttarpradesh
(4) lions
2. The most famous park of India in conserving wild
life in northern India is 11. With the change in height, the climate changes and
that changes the
(1) Rajaji Park (2) Ranthambor
(3) Jim Corbett Park (4) Sultanpur (1) natural vegetation
3. Mangrove of desert are (2) composition of atmosphere
(1) forest grow in semi-Bengal tiger. (3) topography

N
(2) famous for Royal Bengal tiger. (4) water cycle
(3) found in rainier parts of India. 12. The entire rainfall in India is brought in by the
(4) used extensively for grazing (1) north-east monsoon

E
4. Acacias palms, euphoria and cactus are plants com- (2) retreating monsoon
mon in the
(3) western disturbances
(1) Thorn forest

L
(4) south-west monsoon
(2) Tropical deciduous forest
(3) Mangrove forest 13. Which of the following trees is used for treating

L
blood pressure?
(4) Montane forest
5. The southern slopes of the Himalayan region are (1) Jamun (2) Tidal
covered in thick vegetation as compared to the (3) Neem (4) Sarpagandha

A
northern slopes of the same hills as 14. Which of the following forests is found in heavy rain-
(1) it receives less rainfall. fall areas of the Western Ghats, island groups and
(2) it receive less sunlight (phoeriod) as compared upper parts of Assam?
to the northern slopes.
(1) Tropical evergreen
(3) the soil of southern slope is less fertile.
(2) Tropical deciduous
(4) it recieves more rainfall
(3) Mountain forest
6. Trees grow faster in
(4) Tidal forests
(1) winter (2) autumn
(3) summer (4) spring 15. One of the commercially important trees of tropi-
cal rain forest is
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

7. The union territories in India with maximum


tropical deciduous forests is (1) silver fir (2) junipers
(1) sal (2) shisham (3) cedar (4) mahogany
(3) teak (4) deodar 16. Some of the eco-developental projects in India are
8. The correct definition of the ‘biome’ is areas having Project Rhino, Project Great Indian Bustard and
(1) large forest cover (1) Project Tiger (2) Project Deer
(2) large ecosystem on land with distinct vegetation
(3) Project Leopard (4) Project Lion
and animal life.
17. The most widespread forest of India are
(3) enough water on land
(4) only animal population (1) tropical deciduous forests.
9. To cure cough and cold we use (2) tropical rain forests.
(1) arjun (2) neem (3) mangrove forests.
(3) babool (4) tulsi (4) montane forests.

86
ALLEN Social Science
18. Some statements are given below : 27. At which of the following places are Royal Bengal
A. Mangrove forests are found in tropical regions tigers found ?
in India. (1) Mahanadi delta (2) Godawari delta
B. Coniferous forests are found in tropical regions (3) Kaveri delta (4) Sunderban delta
of India. 28. Ebony and rosewood trees are found in the areas
C. Date palms are a part of desert vegetation. of rainfall
D. Evergreen forest shed their leaves periodically (1) more than 200 cm
Which of the above statements are true ? (2) more than 100 cm
(1) A, B, and C (2) A, C and D (3) more than 70 cm
(3) B, C and D (4) A,B and D (4) less than 50 cm
19. The natural habitat of the Indian lion is the 29. The yak, shaggy-horned wild ox and the Tibetan
(1) Sundarbans forest antelope are found in which one of the following
regions?
(2) Kaziranga national park
(1) Tibet (2) Uttarakhand
(3) Gir forest

N
(3) Himachal Pradesh (4) Ladakh
(4) Manas sanctuary
30. Which among the following natural vegetation
20. Softwood evergreen trees are useful for making

E
is most predominant in India?
(1) furniture (2) building houses
(1) Tropical deciduous forest
(3) pulp (4) vehicles
(2) Alpine forest

L
21. Leaves are mostly thick and small to minimize
(3) Thorny bushes
evaporation in
(4) Mangrove forest
(1) thorn forest and scrubs.

L
31. Which one of the following is the Biosphere Re-
(2) tropical deciduous forest
serve of India?
(3) montane forest
(1) Gir (2) Nilgiri
(4) mangrove forest

A
(3) Kanheri (4) None of these
22. The kind of vegetation in the tropical rain forest is
32. Where in India do flamingos migrate to nest in large
(1) Shrubs (2) Acacias
numbers?
(3) Deodar (4) Palm
(1) Thar (2) Rann of Kachchh
23. The Tropical Deciduous forest is also known as
(3) Coastal areas (4) Himalayas
(1) monsoon forest (2) tidal forest
33. Which forest is affected by tides in coastal areas?
(3) temperate forest (4) tundra forest
(1) Alpine (2) Coniferous
24. Guindy is a
(3) Deciduous (4) Mangroves
(1) medicinal plant (2) National Park
34. Dachigam in Jammu and Kashmir is a
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

(3) Indian blue bull (4) Tibetan association


(1) National Park (2) Wildlife Sanctuary
25. The bio-reserves that have been included in world
(3) Bird Sanctuary (4) Reserve Forest
network of bio-reserves is
35. Plant community which has grown naturally
(1) Pachmari, Madhya pradesh
without human aid and has been left undis-
(2) Gulf of Mannar, Tamil Nadu turbed by humans for long time, is termed as :
(3) Great Nicobar, Tamil Nadu (1) Tundra vegetation (2) Virgin vegetation
(4) Nokrek, Meghalaya (3) Taiga plants (4) None of the above
26. Ebony, mahogany and rosewood trees are grown 36. In which of the following parts of India evergreen
in which type of the following forests ? forests are found?
(1) Deciduous forest (2) Tropical rainforest (1) Assam (2) Rajasthan
(3) Tropical thorn forest (4) Coniferous forest (3) Orissa (4) Uttar Pradesh
87
Class X ALLEN
37. Which parts of Himalayas are covered with dense 44. Which one of the following animals lives in the
forest? swampy and marshy lands of Assam and West
(1) Northern (2) Eastern Bengal?

(3) Western (4) Southern (1) Tiger (2) Lion


38. How many types of plant species are found in In- (3) One-horned Rhino (4) Elephants
dia? 45. A very large ecosystem on land having distinct type
(1) About 45,000 (2) About 40,000 of vegetation and wildlife is called
(3) About 47,000 (4) About 20,000 (1) Ecology (2) Biome
39. Tropical rainforests grow well in areas receiving (3) Biodiversity (4) Biosphere reserve
rainfall, more then 46. Which medicinal plant has high antibiotic and anti-
(1) 200 cm (2) 150 cm bacterial properties
(3) 100 cm (4) 70 cm (1) Sarpagandha (2) Neem
40. Conical trees are found in the (3) Kachnar (4) Babool

N
(1) deserts (2) hill slopes 47. The Yak (ox) and the Bharal are found in.
(3) coastal areas (4) plains (1) Uttarakhand (2) Himachal Pradesh

E
41. Ebony, Mahogany and Rosewood trees are grown (3) Jammu and Kashmir (4) Ladakh
in which of the following forests? 48. Silver fir is found in the following type of vegetation
(1) Coniferrous forests zone :

L
(2) Tropical rainforest (1) Mangrove forests
(3) Tropical thorn forest (2) Thorn forests

L
(4) Deciduous forest (3) Montane
42. The elephants are found in the hot-wet forests of (4) Decidous forest
(1) Punjab and Haryana 49. Trees in a thorn forest are :

A
(2) Rajasthan and Gujarat (1) Tall (2) dense
(3) West Bengal and Jharkhand (3) scattered (4) None of these
(4) Assam and Karnataka 50. Most widespread vegetation in India is
43. In which year Wildlife Protection Act was imple- (1) Coniferous forests
mented in India? (2) Tropical rainforests
(1) 1952 (2) 1962 (3) Tropical deciduous forests
(3) 1972 (4) 1982 (4) Mangrove forests
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

ANSWER KEY
Q ue . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . 1 3 2 1 2 3 3 2 4 2 1 4 4 1 4 1 1 2 3 1
Q ue . 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans . 1 1 1 2 2 2 4 1 4 1 2 2 4 2 2 1 4 3 1 2
Q ue . 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans . 2 4 3 3 2 2 4 3 3 3

88
ALLEN Social Science
19. AGRICULTURE
n Importance of Agriculture in India

Two-thirds of Indias population is engaged in agriculture, produces most of the food that we consume, produces
raw material for various industries.

n Types of Farming

l Primitive Subsistence Farming : Practised on small patches of land with the help of primitive tools,
farming depends upon monsoon, natural fertility of soil and suitability of environmental conditions, slash and
burn agriculture (farmers clear a patch of land and grows crops, when the soil fertility decreases, the farmers
shift and clear a fresh patch of land). Known by different names - Jhumming in north-eastern states, Dipa in
Bastar district in Chattisgarh, and in Andaman and Nicobar Islands. The slash and burn method is known as
milpa in mexico.

N
l Intensive Subsistence farming : Practised in areas of high population, labour intensive farming, high
dose of biochemical inputs and irrigation used, land-holding size are uneconomical but the farmers still continue

E
to take maximum output from the limited land. It is largely practised in West Bengal.

l Commercial Farming : Use of higher dose of modern inputs, e.g. high yielding variety of seeds, chemical

L
fertilisers, insecticides and pesticides, degrees of commercilisation of agriculture varies from one region to
another

L
l Plantation Agriculture : A single crop is grown on a large area, an interface of agriculture and industry,
covers large tracts of lands, using capital intensive inputs produce is used as raw material. Tea, coffee,
rubber sugarcane, banana are important plantation crops. A well developed network of transport and

A
communication connecting the plantation areas, processing industry and markets.

n Cropping Pattern

l Kharif Crops

} Crops grown with the onset of monsoon, harvested in September-October.

} Important Crops grown - Paddy, Maize, Jowar, Bajra, Tur (arhar), Moong, Urad, Cotton, Jute, Groundnut,
Soyabean and Castor-Seeds.

} Important regions - Assam, West Bengal coastal regions of Orissa, Andhra Pradesh, Tamil Nadu, Kerala
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

and Maharashtra along with Uttar pradesh and Bihar.

l Rabi Crops

} Sown in winter from October to December and harvested in summer from April to June.

} Important rabi crops - Wheat, Barley, Peas, Gram, Mustard and Castor-Seeds.

} Important regions - Punjab, Haryana, Himachal Pradesh, Jammu and Kashmir, Uttaranchal and Uttar
Pradesh.

l Zaid Crops : Short season during the summer months.

Crops produced - Watermelon, Muskmelon, Cucumber, Vegetables and Fodder crops.

89
Class X ALLEN
n Technological and Institutional Reforms

The Persian wheel has now been replaced by the water-pump, plough by the tiller and harrow drawn by
tractors, bullock-carts by truck. All weather roads and faster means of communications have been introduced.
Flooding of fields are now been replaced by drip irrigation and use of sprinklers. Chemical fertilizers, Bio-
fertilizers, HYV and early maturing quality seeds have been developed.

l Institutional Reforms : Abolition of Zamindari system, consolidation of small land holding. Widespread
use of radio and television for providing knowledge to farmers in new and improved techniques and special
weather bulletins. Crop insurance, easy credit facilities, minimum support price for various crops, Kissan
Credit Card (KCC) and Personal Accident Insurance Scheme (PAIS).

n Efforts by the Government of India to modernise agriculture

Establishment of Indian Council of Agricultural Research, agricultural universities, veterinary services and ani-
mal breeding centres, horticulture development, research and development in the field of meteorology and

N
weather forecast, improving the rural infrastructure.

l Reasons why the growth rate in agriculture is decelarating ?

E
} Challenge from international competition

} Reduction in the public investment in agriculture sector

L
} Subsidy on fertilisers decreased

L
} Reduction in import duties on agricultural products

} Farmers are withdrawing their investment from agriculture.

A CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

90
ALLEN Social Science

AGRICULTURE EXERCISE
1. Another name of shifting agriculture in north- 9. Which one of the following is helpful in inventing
eastern states like Assam is new hybrid varieties of seeds ?
(1) Jhumming cultivation (1) Green Revolution
(2) Commercial farming (2) White Revolution
(3) Plantation agriculture (3) Genetic Engineering
(4) Pisciculture (4) Scientific Research
2. In which of the following states of India is intensive 10. Which one out of the following is a ‘Kharif crop’?
subsistence farming largely practiced ? (1) Maize (2) Wheat
(1) Rajasthan (2) Gujarat (3) Gram (4) Mustard
(3) West Bengal (4) Punjab 11. Introduction of special weather bulletins and
3. A single crop, grown on a large area and using agricultural programmes for farmers on T.V. and

N
intensive capital inputs are some of the major radio is one of the steps taken by the goverment
features of ________ type of agriculature to improve

(1) Intensive subsistence farming (1) Agriculture in india

E
(2) Commerical farming (2) Industries in india

(3) Primitive subsistence farming (3) Forest in india

L
(4) Plantation farming (4) Farmers in india

4. Which one of the following is a Rabi crop ? 12. Which one of the following is announced by the
Government in support of a crop ?

L
(1) Rice (2) Millets
(1) Maximum support price
(3) Gram (4) Cotton
(2) Minimum support price
5. The institutions established by Goverment of India

A
(3) Moderate support price
that helped in modernization of Agriculture is
(4) Influential support price
(1) World Trade Oraganization
13. Which of the following is a Non-farming acitvity ?
(2) Kissan Credit Card
(1) Multiple cropping (2) Crop rotation
(3) Indian Council of Agriculatural Reserach
(3) Dairy farming (4) Modern farming
(4) Indian Institute of Agronomy
14. The Agriculture that is practiced on small patches
6. The ‘slash and burn’ agriculture is known as ‘Milpa’ in
of land with the help of primitive tools like hoe,
(1) Mexico (2) Venzulea dao and digging sticks is
(3) Brazil (4) Indoneisa (1) Shifting Agricualture
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

7. The systems launched by goverment of India to (2) Primitive Subsistence Farming


ensure subsidised prices for food grains to poor in (3) Intensive Subsistence Farming
rural areas is
(4) Commercial Farming
(1) Food Corporation of India
15. Which among the following is a fibre crop?
(2) Buffer Stock
(1) Rubber (2) Jute
(3) Public Distribution System
(3) Tomato (4) Coffee
(4) Kissan Credit System
16. Of which one of the following beverage crops,
8. Which one of the following oil-seed in India is grown India is the leading producer as well as exporter in
in both Rabi and Kharif seasons ? the world?
(1) Groundnut (2) Coconut (1) Coffee (2) Pulses
(3) Castor-seed (4) Mustard (3) Tea (4) Curd
91
Class X ALLEN
17. Which one of the following is the feature of 21. Which of the following crops grows well in the Black
plantation agriculture? soil ?
(1) Single crop (1) Jute (2) Rice
(2) Large area (3) Cotton (4) Wheat
(3) Produce raw material for industries 22. Which one of the following crops is a beverage
(4) All of the above crop?
18. What is the rearing of silkworms for the production (1) Tea (2) Cotton
of silk called? (3) Wheat (4) Bajra
(1) Horticulture (2) Pisciculture 23. Which one of the following is not a cropping
(3) Sericulture (4) Agriculture season?
19. Which one of the following crops is the example of (1) Winter (2) Kharif
plantation farming?
(3) Rabi (4) Zaid
(1) Rice (2) Wheat

N
24. 'Slash and burn agriculture' is a
(3) Rubber (4) None of these
(1) Shifting agriculture
20. Which of the following crops are grown with the

E
(2) Intensive agriculture
onset of monsoons and are harvested in the month
of September and October? (3) Commercial agriculture

L
(1) Rabi (4) None of these

(2) Kharif 25. What is the full form of KCC ?

L
(3) Zaid (1) Kissan Credit Card (2) Kashmir Credit Card

(4) None of the above (3) Kolkatta Credit Card (4) Kissan Creator Card

A CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

ANSWER KEY
Qu e. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
An s . 1 3 4 3 3 1 3 3 1 1 1 2 3 2 2 3 4 3 3 2
Qu e. 21 22 23 24 25
An s . 3 1 1 1 1

92
ALLEN Social Science
20. WATER RESOURCES
Freshwater is mainly obtained from surface run off and ground water that is continuqusly being renewed and
recharged through the hydrological cycle. All water moves within the hydrological cycle ensuring that water is a
renewable resource.
2.5% of the total volume of world’s water is estimated to exist as fresh water. Main source of fresh water is in
form of precipitatio, surface runoff and ground water.
n Water scarcity
Water scarcity is a situation wherein adequate water is not available to meet its requirement in different uses.
Broadly speaking, water scarcity may be caused by (i) over-exploitation, (ii) excessive use, and (iii) unequal
access to water among different social groups.
Another situation when water is sufficiently valuable to meet the needs of the people, but the areas still suffer
from water scarcity, due to bad quality of water.
9.6% of the total volume of worlds water is estimated to exist as oceans.
Increasing population a cause of water scarcity :

N
} Greater demands of water, and unequal access to it.
} Water resources are being overexploited to expand irrigated areas and dry-season agriculture.

E
} Leads to falling groundwater levels, adversely affecting water availability and food security of the people.
n Urbanisation and Industrialisation adversely affect the availability of water
} Industry itself is a heavy user of water, in its different processes.

L
} Industry requires power to run machinery and equipment. Power is generated from water.
} Multiplying urban centres with large and dense populations and urban lifestyles add to water and energy

L
requirements.
} Growing water requirements are met by pumping underground water, it results in decline in the level of
underground water.

A
} Ground water is the major of fresh water in India.
n Multi-Purpose River Valley Projects and Integrated Water Resource Management
Dams were traditionally built to impound rivers and rainwater that could be used later to irrigate agricultural
fields.
l Multi-Purpose River Valley Projects - A dam or a series of dam are built on a river and its tributaries to
solve various purposes.
(i) Control on flood and drought.
(ii) Checks soils erosion.
(iii) Provides water for irrigation, drinking and industrial purposes.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

(iv) Generates electricity.


(v) Provides inland purposes.
(vi) Provides facilities for recreation.
(vii)Preservation of wildlife, forests and development of fisheries.
l Dames built on various rivers
(i) Hirakud dam built on river Mahanadi.
(ii) Salal dam built on river Chenab.
(iii) Nagarjuna dam built on river Krishna.
(iv) Sardar Sarovar dam built on river Narmada.
(v) Koyna dam built on river Krishna.
(vi) Tehri dam built on river Bhagirathi.

93
Class X ALLEN
l Negative features of Multi-purpose River Valley Project
} Affect river’s natural flow causing poor sediment flow and excessive sedimentation at the bottom of the
reservoir, resulting in rockier stream beds and poorer habitats for the rivers’ aquatic life.
} Makes it difficult for aquatic fauna to migrate, especially for spawning. Also submerges the existing
vegetation and soil.
} Large-scale displacement in the cropping pattern of many regions.
} Has changed the cropping pattern of many soils.
} Ecological consequences like salinisation of the soil.
} Has transformed the social landscape i.e. increasing the social gap, creates conflicts between people
wanting different uses and benefits from the same water resources.
} Inter-state water disputes are also becoming common.
} Failure to achieve the purposes for which they were built. Ironically, mostly been unsuccessful in control-
ling floods at the time of excessive rainfall.
} Sedimentation also meant that the flood plains were deprived of silt.

N
} The multi-purpose projects induced earthquakes, caused water borne diseases and pests and pollution
resulting from excessive use of water.

E
n Rainwater Harvesting

In Ancient India, there existed an extraordinary tradition of water-harvesting system.

L
} ‘Guls’ & ‘Kuls’ of the Western Himalayas for agriculture.

} Roof top rainwater harvesting was commonly practised to store drinking water particularly in Rajasthan.

L
} In the flood plains of Bengal, people developed inundation channels to irrigate their fields.

} ‘Khadins’ in Jaisalmer and ‘Johads’ in other parts of Rajasthan.

A
l Rainwater Harvesting in semi-arid regions of Rajasthan

In the semi-arid and arid regions of Rajasthan, particularly in Bikaner, Phalodi and Barmer, almost all the
houses traditionally had underground tanks or tankas for storing drinking water. The rainwater can be stored
in tankas till the next rainfall making it an extremely reliable source of drinking water when all other sources
are dried up. In Gendathur, a remote backward village in Mysore Karnataka, villagers have installed in their
household’s rooftop, rainwater harvesting system to meet their water needs. Gendathur receives an annual
precipitation of 1,000 mm, and with 80 per cent of collection efficiency and of about 10 fillings, every house
can collect and use about 50,000 litres of water annually. In Rajasthan, Palar Pani is considered the purest
form of natural water.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

94
ALLEN Social Science
WATER RESOURCES EXERCISE
1. The ecologists and the environmentalists are against 8. A large population affecting water resources
big dams and multi purpose projects as it adversely due to
(1) Produces hydroelectricity (1) Building of dams
(2) Produces more vegatation and soil (2) Digging of canals
(3) Affects their natural flow causing excessive (3) Prayers offered for rain
sedimentation on the river beds resulting in poor
(4) Higher food grain production
habital for the rivers’ aquatic life
9. Rooftop rainwater harvesting system in Rajasthan
(4) Easy for the aquatic fauna to migrate
is known as :
2. The increase in urbanzation and industrialization has
(1) Guls (2) Kuls
affected not only the quantity, but also the
(1) Salinity of water resources (3) Tankas (4) Baobs

(2) Quality of water resources 10. Which one of the following is not an adverse effect

N
of dams?
(3) Accumulation of water resources
(1) Interstate water disputes
(4) Potential of water resources

E
(2) Excessive sedimentation of Reservoir
3. Which one of the following is right option for ‘guls’
or ‘kuls’ of Himalayan region ? (3) Displacement of population

L
(1) These are water bodies in western Himalayan (4) Flood control
region
11. Which of the following is not a method of water
(2) These are water channels in western Himalayan

L
harvesting used in Rajasthan?
region
(1) Johads (2) Khadins
(3) These are water channels in eastern Himalayan
(3) Guls (4) Tankas
region

A
12. How much of the earth surface is covered with
(4) These are diversion channels for agriculture in
water?
Himalayas
(1) About 1/4 (2) About 1/2
4. Hirakud dam is situated on River
(1) Narmada (2) Mahanadi (3) About 3/4 (4) About 2/3

(3) Sutlej (4) Ganga 13. On which one of the following rivers the Tehri Dam
is being constructed?
5. Which one of the following village has adopted rain
water harvesting techniques in South India ? (1) Bhagirathi (2) Yamuna

(1) Mattur village in Karnataka (3) Koshi (4) Sutlej


CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

(2) Gulberga in Karnataka 14. How much percent of the total volume of world's
water is estimated to exist as fresh water?
(3) Gendathur in Mysore-Karnataka
(1) 2.5 (2) 3.5 (3) 4.5 (4) 5.5
(4) Mithapur in Kerala
15. Which of the following is a source of Fresh water ?
6. The state using rooftop rainwater harvesting on
extensive scale is (1) Precipitation (2) Surface runoff
(1) Punjab (2) Delhi (3) Groundwater (4) All the above
(3) Haryana (4) Rajasthan 16. In which of the following regions, people built 'Guls'
7. The state prone to floods is and 'Kuls' for irrigation?

(1) Rajasthan (2) Madhya pradesh (1) Northern Plains (2) Western Himalayas

(3) Assam (4) Delhi (3) Coastal areas (4) None of these

95
Class X ALLEN
17. Salal Dam is built on which river? 23. In which one of the following states palar pani is
(1) Chenab (2) Mahanadi considered the purest form of natural water?

(3) Krishna (4) Satluj (1) Gujarat (2) Rajasthan

18. Tanka, a rainwater harvesting technique, is associ- (3) Madhya Pradesh (4) Chhattisgarh
ated with which of the following states? 24. Which of the following is not the cause of water
(1) Tamil Nadu (2) West Himalayas scarcity ?

(3) Gujarat (4) Rajasthan (1) Rapid growth of population

19. Which of the following is not one of the reasons for (2) Uneven distribution of water resources
criticism of multipurpose river valley projects?
(3) Construction of dams and reserves
(1) They create a rockier stream bed
(4) Increase in demand
(2) They create poorer habitats for the river's
acquatic life 25. Which state has made rooftop rainwater harvesting

N
structure compulsory to all the houses across the
(3) The reservoirs created in the floodplain sub- state?
merge vegetation
(1) Kerala

E
(4) They help in generation of hydroelectricity
(2) Karnataka
20. What percentage of the total volume of world's water

L
is estimated to exist as oceans? (3) Tamil Nadu

(1) 94.5% (2) 95.5% (4) Andhra Pradesh

L
(3) 96.5% (4) 97.5% 26. On which of the following rivers is Koyna dam built?
21. Nagarjuna Sagar Dam is built on which river? (1) Krishna (2) Kaveri

(1) Clenab (2) Mahanadi (3) Ganga (4) Mahanadi

A
(3) Krishna (4) Satluj 27. Which of these is the major source of fresh water in
22. Sardar Sarovar Dam is constructed on : India?

(1) River Krishna (2) River Mahanadi (1) Ground water (2) Ocean water

(3) River Cauvery (4) River Narmada (3) Tanks (4) Waterfalls

CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

ANSWER KEY
Qu e. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
An s . 3 2 4 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 3 1 1 4 2 1 4 4 3
Qu e. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
An s . 3 4 2 3 3 1 1

96
ALLEN Social Science
21. MINERALS AND ENERGY RESOURCES
n What is a mineral ?
Any naturally occurring inorganic material that has a definite chemical composition and characteristics physical
properties.
n Mode of occurence of minerals
l Main types of formations in which minerals occur -
} In Igneous and Metamorphic rocks
} In Sedimentary rocks
} Residual mass of weathered material i.e. Bauxite
} Alluvial or Placer deposits
} Oceanic deposits
“India is fortunate to have a fairly rich and varied mineral resources. However these are unevenly distributed.”

N
n Types of Minerals
Metallic and Non-Metallic.

E
Metallic Minerals includes - Ferrous Minerals and Non-Ferrous Minerals
n Ferrous Minerals
Minerals that contain iron is called Ferrous Minerals.

L
l Type of iron ore found in India
(i) Magnetite (ii) Haematite

L
l Major iron ore belts in India
} Orissa - Jharkhand belt
} Durg - Bastar - Chandrapur belt

A
} Bellary - Chitradurga - Chikmanglur - Tumkur belt - Kudermukh Mines.
l Manganese : Used in manufacturing bleaching powder, insecticides and paints Orissa is the largest producer.
n Non-Ferrous Minerals
Minerals do not contain iron is called Non-Ferrous.
l Copper
} Use of Copper
} Distribution - Balaghat mines in M.P. produces 52% of India’s copper ; Singhbhum district in Jharkhand;
Khetri mines in Rajasthan
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

l Bauxite
} Importance of Aluminium
} Distribution - Amarkantak plateau, Maikal hills and the plateau region of Bilaspur - Katni.
} Orissa is the largest bauxite producing state.
n Non - Metallic Minerals
l Use of Mica - In electricity industry.
Distribution
} Koderma - Gaya Hazaribagh belt of Jharkhand
} Ajmer in Rajasthan
} Nellore mica belt of Andhra Pradesh

97
Class X ALLEN
n Rock Minerals
l Limestone
Area where it is found is the basic raw material for the cement industry and essential for smelting iron ore in
the blast furnance.
n Conservation of Minerals
l Why conservation of minerals is important ?
We are rapidly consuming mineral resources the required millions of years to be created and concentrated.
The geological processes of mineral formation are so slow that the rate of replenishment are infinitely small
in comparision to the present rate of consumption.
l Steps that can be taken for the conservation of minerals
} Minerals can be used in planned and sustainable manner.
} Improved technologies.
} Recycling the metals.

N
n Energy Resources
Energy resources can be classified as conventional and non-conventional sources

E
n Coventional Sources of Energy
l Coal

L
Importance of Coal
Used for power generation, to supply energy to industry as well as for domestic needs.

L
Types of Coal
} Lignite

A
} Bituminous
} Anthracite
Coal occurs in rock series of two main geological ages - Gondwana & Tertiary Coals

l Petroleum

} Importance of Petroleum

(i) It provides fuel for heat and light.

(ii) It provides lubricants for machinery.


CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

} Formation of Petroleum

In region of folding anticlines or domes, it occurs where oil is trapped in the crest of the upfold.

} Distribution of Petroleum in India

63% of India’s petroleum production is from Mumbai high, 18% from Gujarat and 16% from Assam.
Digboi and Naharkatiya.

l Natural Gas

Importance of Natural Gas - It is uses as source of energy and also as an industrial raw material in petro
chemical.

Distribution of Natural Gas in India - Assam, Gulf of Khambhat, Cuddalore district of Tamil Nadu.

Hazira - Bijaipur - Jagdishpur cross country gas pipeline


98
ALLEN Social Science
l Electricity

Three ways by which electricity is generated :

} Hydro Electricity

} Thermal Electricity

} Nuclear or Atomic Energy

n Non - Conventional Sources of Energy

Growing importance of non-conventional over conventional sources of energy

l Solar Energy : Photovoltaic technology converts sunlight directly into electricity Largest solar palnt of India,
located at Madhopur, near Bhuj Importance of Solar energy for India

l Wind Power : India now ranks as a ‘Wind Super Power’ The largest wind farm cluster located in Tamil Nadi
from Nagarcoil to Madurai.

l Biogas : Importance of Biogas for Rural India

N
(i) Renewable source of energy (ii) Non-Polluting

(iii) Reduces landfills (iv) Cheaper technology

E
l Tidal energy : How tidal energy is produced ?

L
Tidal energy is produced throught the use of tidal energy generators.

Gulf of Kuchchh provides ideal conditions for utilising tidal energy

L
l Geo Thermal Energy : Where Geo thermal energy exists ?

Geo thermal energy comes from the heat within the earth.

Two experimental (Parvati & Puga valley) projects have been set up in India.

A
n Conservation of Energy Resources

Why conservation of energy resources is required ?

Energy is required for the activities. It is needed.

(i) To cook (ii) To provide heat and light

(iii) To propel vehicles (iv) To drive machinery is industries.

Steps that can be taken for the conservation of energy resoures.


CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

99
Class X ALLEN
MINERALS AND ENERGY RESOURCES EXERCISE
1. In which state of India the Balaghat Copper Mines 10. Electricity generated by burning fossil-fuels is called:
are situated ? (1) Hydro-electricity (2) Tidal electricity
(1) Punjab (2) Kerala (3) Thermal electricity (4) Nuclear energy
(3) Madhya Pradesh (4) West Bengal 11. Read the following statement and choose the best
possible choice. “Energy saved is energy produced”
2. The largest bauxite producing state in India is
(1) It’s about industrial energy planning
(1) Orissa (2) Uttar Pardesh
(2) It’s about consumption of energy
(3) Punjab (4) Karnataka
(3) It’s about sustaninable energy
3. Which one of the following minerals is formed
(4) It’s about conservation of energy resources
through residual mass of weathered material ?
12. ________ is the oldest oil producing state of India.
(1) Iron (2) Zinc
(1) Gujarat (2) Maharashtra
(3) Bauxite (4) Coal
(3) Assam (4) Mizoram

N
4. In which of the following iron ore belt Kudremukh 13. The most common source of energy in rural India is
mines are located ?
(1) Thermal energy
(1) Orissa-Jharkhand belt
(2) Solar energy

E
(2) Maharashtra-Goa belt (3) Cow dung or Cattle dung cake
(3) Durg-Baster-Chandrapur belt (4) Tidal energy

L
(4) Bellary-Chitradiga-Chikmaglur-Tumkur belt 14. Which one of the following places is very ideal for
5. Madhapur, Bhuj is the largest producer of generating tidal energy for power plant ?

L
(1) Petroleum (2) Coal (1) Maharashtra (2) Uttar Pradesh

(3) Wind energy (4) Solar energy (3) Gulf of Kuchchh (4) Gulf of Cambey
15. The best quality of iron ore is :
6. The major aluminum producing ore is-

A
(1) Magnetite (2) Pyrite
(1) Magnetite (2) Bauxite
(3) Hematite (4) Siderite
(3) Mica (4) Manganese
16. The largest producer of manganese ores in India
7. Which one of the following is interested in the formation
is the state of
of the minerals and their composition ?
(1) Karnataka (2) Orissa
(1) Environmentalists (2) Forest dwellers
(3) Madhya Pradesh (4) Uttar Pradesh
(3) Geographers (4) Geologist
17. In which one of the following states of India oldest
8. The following is located in the Parvati valley near gold mine is located ?
Manikarn in Himachal Pradesh and in the Puga
(1) Panna in Madhya Pradesh
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

Valley, Ladakh
(2) Jharia in West Bengal
(1) Tidal energy plant
(3) Kolar in Karnataka
(2) Solar energy plant
(4) Shinghbhum in Jharkhand
(3) Geothermal energy plant 18. The major aluminium producing ore is
(4) Atomic energy plant (1) Magnetite (2) Bauxite
9. The mines in India that produce 52% of India’s (3) Mica (4) Manganese
Copper is 19. Which of the following includes non-ferrous metals ?
(1) Singhbhum in Jharkhand (1) Iron and manganese
(2) Khetri mines in Rajasthan (2) Steel and iron ore
(3) Balaghat mines in Madhya Pradesh (3) Haematite and magnetite
(4) Gaya mines in Bihar (4) Copper and bauxite

100
ALLEN Social Science
20. Where is an experimental geo-thermal energy 24. Which one of the following minerals belongs to
project located in India ? a category which is different from others ?
(1) Gulf of Kuchch - Gujarat (1) Mica (2) Gold

(2) Puga valley - Ladakh (3) Copper (4) Iron


25. The highest quality of hard coal is :
(3) Ganga valley - Himachal Pradesh
(1) Lignite (2) Bituminous
(4) Nagarcoil - Tamil Nadu
(3) Peat (4) Anthracite
21. Which one of the following does not influence
26. Which one of the following is largely derived
the location of industries ?
from ocean water?
(1) Availability of raw material and electricity.
(1) Bauxite (2) Magnesium
(2) Availability of markets and capital. (3) Gold (4) Mica
(3) Availability of raw material and labour. 27. Mica is extensively used in
(4) Availability of educational and medical services. (1) Steel industry (2) Electrical industry

N
22. Which one of the following is not true regarding the (3) Rubber plantation (4) Fertiliser industry
importance of manufacturing industries ? 28. Which one of the following minerals is largely de-

E
(1) They generate jobs in the secondary and rived from Ocean Waters ?
tertiary sectors. (1) Bromine (2) Silver

L
(2) Export of manufactured goods brings in foreign (3) Platinum (4) Bauxite
exchange. 29. In which state of India are the Khetri Copper mines
situated ?

L
(3) Manufacturing industries encourage trade and
commerce. (1) Punjab (2) Jharkhand
(4) The economic strength of a country is measured (3) Rajasthan (4) Madhya Pradesh

A
in terms of the raw material it possesses. 30. What is the importance of Biogas for Rural India ?
23. Which mineral belongs to the category of (1) Renewable source of energy
ferrous minerals? (2) Non-Polluting
(1) Iron ore (2) Manganese (3) Reduces landfills
(3) Cobalt (4) Copper (4) All of these
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

ANSWER KEY
Qu e. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
An s . 3 1 3 4 4 2 4 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 1 2 3 2 4 2
Qu e. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
An s . 4 4 4 2 4 2 2 1 3 4

101
Class X ALLEN
22. MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES
n Manufacturing is production of goods in large quantities after processing raw materials to more valuable products.
n Classification of Industries is done on the basis of their main role, capital investment, ownership, source of raw
materials and the bulk and weight of raw material and finished goods.
l Large Scale Industries employ a large number of labourers.
l Small Scale Industries employ a small number of labourers.
l Heavy Industries use heavy and bulky raw materials.
l Light Industries use light raw materials.
l Manufacturing is considered the backbone of development in general and economic development in
particular.
l The NMCC (National Manufacturing Competitiveness Council) was set up when it was felt that, with appro-
priate policy interventions by the government and renewed efforts by the industry to improve productivity,
manufacturing can achieve its target over the next decade.
l Industrial locations are influenced by availability of raw materials, labour, capital, power and market. It is
rarely possible to find all these factors available at one place.

N
n Agro-based industries
Industries based on agricultural raw materials. The first successful textile mill was established in Mumbai (Bombay).
For example, cotton textiles, jute textiles, woollen textiles, silk textiles, synthetic textiles, sugar industry.

E
l Cotton Textiles : It occupies an unique position in Indian economy, contributes 14% of industtrial produc-
tion. Provides employment to 35 million persons directly. Earlier the cotton textile industries were located
in Maharashtra and Gujarat. Today, they are spread over 80 towns and cities of India. Scarcity of good-

L
quality cotton, obsolete machinery, erratic power supply, low productivity of labour and stiff competition are
some of the problems faced by the cotton textiles industry.

L
l Jute Textiles : There are about 70 jute mills in India and most of the jute is produced in West Bengal.
Mainly in the Hugli basin. Also produced in Andhra Pradesh, Bihar, Uttar Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh, Orissa,
Assam and Tripura.
l Sugar : There are 460 sugar mills in the country. 50% of them are found in Uttar Pradesh and Maharashtra.

A
Karnataka, Tamil Nadu, Andhra Pradesh and Gujarat are also important producers of sugar in the country.
l Mineral-based Industries : Industries using minerals as their raw materials - Iron and steel, cement,
chemical industries, aluminium smelting, copper smelting, fertiliser industry, etc.
n Iron and Steel Industry
} The iron works of Kulti, Burnpur started local production in 1870.
} The first modern steel plant was set up at Jamshedpur in 1907.
} Today there are 10 primary integrated iron and steel plants and around 200 mini steel plants in the
country.
} Raw materials used in this industry are iron ore, coal, limestone and manganese ore.
} The location of this industry is decided by the availability of raw materials. All the important iron
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

and steel plants are located in the north-eastern and southern parts of the Indian Peninsula.
} Only Visakhapatnam has a coastal location.
} These plants are managed by the Steel Authority of India Ltd. (SAIL)
} India produces about 32.8 million tonne of steel and ranks ninth among the world crude steel producers.
n Aluminium Smelting
} Aluminium is a good conductor of heat and electricity.
} It is used as a substitute of steel, copper, zinc and lead.
} In the production of one tonne of Aluminium, 6 tonnes of Bauxite and 18,600 KWH of electricity is
required.
} The availability of electricity and bauxite decides the location of this industry.
} The 8 Aluminium plants in the country are located in Orissa, West Bengal, Kerala, Uttar Pradesh,
Chhattisgarh, Maharashtra and Tamil Nadu.
} India produces over 600 million tonnes of Aluminium per annum.

102
ALLEN Social Science
n Chemical Industry
} Heavy inorganic chemicals include sulphuric acid, nitric acid, alkalis, caustic soda and soda ash. They are
widely spread around the country.
} Sulphuric acid is used in the manufacture of fertilisers, synthetic fibres, plastics, paints and dyes.
} Soda ash is used in the manufacture of glass, paper, soap and detergents.
} Heavy organic chemicals include petrochemicals which are used in the manufacture of synthetic fibres,
synthetic rubber, plastics, dyestuffs, drugs and pharmaceuticals. These chemical plants are located
near oil refineries and petrochemical plants.
} The chemical industries contribute 14% of the production of entire manufacturing sector.
n Fertiliser Industry
} The first plant was set up at Ranipet in Tamil Nadu.
} With the setting up of a plant at Sindri by the Fertiliser Corporation of India (FCI) in 1951, the production
of fertilisers increased.
} With the onset of the Green Revolution, this industry was set up in Gujarat, Tamil Nadu, Uttar Pradesh,
Punjab and Kerala.
} Other important producers are Andhra Pradesh, Orissa, Rajasthan, Bihar, Maharashtra, Assam,
West Bengal, Goa, Delhi, Madhya Pradesh and Karnataka.

N
} There are 57 fertiliser units manufacturing nitrogenous fertilisers, 29 for urea and 9 for ammonium
sulphate as a by-product, 68 other small units produce single super phosphate.
n Cement Industry

E
} Cement is used for the construction of buildings, houses, factories, roads and dams.
} The raw materials used are limestone, silica, alumina and gypsum, coal and electric power are also used.
} The first cement plant was set up at Chennai in 1904. At present, there are 119 large and over 300 mini

L
cement plants in India.
} Indian cement is in great demand in South and East Asia, Middle East and Africa because of its superior
quality.

L
n Automobiles : Commercial vehicles like trucks, passenger buses, cars, motor cycles, scooters, etc., are
manufactured in large numbers. India is the second largest producer of three wheelers. The industries produc-
ing bicycles, scooters and bicycles are distributed around Delhi, Gurgaon, Mumbai, Pune, Chennai, Kolkata,

A
Lucknow, Indore, Hyderabad, Jamshedpur and Bengaluru.
n Electronic Industry : Bengaluru has emerged as the electronic capital of India. Other major electronic goods
producing centres are Hyderabad, Delhi, Mumbai, Chennai, Kolkata, Kanpur, Pune, Lucknow and Coimbatore.
Many Software Technology Parks have also developed.
n Industries create four types of pollution, namely air, water, land and noise.
l Air pollution : It is caused due to the presence of carbon monoxide and sulphur dioxide. Dust, fume, mist
spray and smoke contain both types of particles.
l Water pollution : Coal, dyes, soaps, pesticides, fertilisers, plastics and rubber are some common pollut-
ants. The principal industries which create water pollution are paper pulp, textiles, chemical, petroleum,
refinery, tannery and electroplating.
} Thermal pollution of water occurs when hot-water from factories and thermal plants is drained into
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

rivers and ponds before cooling.


l Noise pollution : Means unwanted, extra, noise created due to industrial machineries etc.
l Land pollution : Is the degradation of earth’s land surfaces often caused by human activities and its misuse.
n Measures to Control Environmental Degradation :
} Proper fuel selection and utilisation.
} Use of oil instead of coal in the industries.
} Treatment of liquids in three phases
(i) Primary treatment by mechanical process.
(ii) Secondary treatment by biological process.
(iii) Tertiary treatment by biological, chemical and physical processes.
} Pollution of land and soil can be
(i) Collection of wastes from different places.
(ii) Dumping and disposing the wastes by land-filling.
(iii) Recycling of wastes for further use.
103
Class X ALLEN
MANUFACTURING INDUSTRIES EXERCISE

1. Industries owned and operated by an individual or 7. TISCO is the type of


a group of individuals are called
(1) Agro-Based Industry
(1) Joint sector industries
(2) Ownership Industry
(2) Private sector industries
(3) Mineral Based Industry
(3) Public sector industries
(4) Cooperative sector industries (4) IT Based Industry
2. Which one of the following is not true regarding 8. Which one of the following steel plants is located
the iron and steel industry in India ? in Chhattisgarth ?
(1) India is the largest producer of sponge iron (1) Bokaro (2) Durgapur
(2) Most of the public sector undertakings market
(3) Bhilai (4) Rourkela
their steel through the Steel Authority of India
9. The first successful textile mill was established in:

N
(3) Chhot anagpur Plateau region has the
maximum concentration of iron and steel industries (1) Delhi (2) Vishakhapattnam
(4) As a leading iron and steel producing country, (3) Chennai (4) Mumbai (Bombay)

E
India does not need to import steel from other 10. Where was the first Cement Plant set up in India?
countries
(1) Mumbai (2) Kolkata

L
3. The common factor among cotton textile industry,
sugar industry and jute industry is that all are (3) Chennai (4) Delhi

(1) Mineral-based industries 11. This industry means an industry in which artisans

L
(2) Agro-based industries work on wood, tusk, stone, brass and silver in the
(3) Information technology industries house itself
(4) Privately owned industries (1) mineral based industry

A
4. The industries that manufactures telephone, (2) public sector industry
computers, etc is
(3) cottage industry
(1) Steel industry
(4) none of these
(2) Aluminium industry
12. Manufacturing Industries are placed in :
(3) Electronic industry
(1) Primary sector (2) Secondary sector
(4) Information technology
(3) Tertiary sector (4) Service sector
5. Which one of the following groups of states have
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

the largest number of cotton textile centres ? 13. Textile industry is an example of:
(1) Gujarat and Maharashtra (1) Agro based industry
(2) Karnataka and Tamil Nadu (2) Cooperative based industry
(3) Maharashtra and Madhya Pradesh (3) Mineral based industry
(4) Uttar Pradesh and Gujarat (4) Marine based industry
6. The areas with concentration of jute mills in India are 14. What is the full form of SAIL ?
(1) Maharashtra (1) Shipping Authority of India
(2) Gujarat (2) Sugar Authority of India Limited
(3) Banks of Hugli river, West Bengal
(3) Steel Authority of India Limited
(4) Uttar Pradesh (4) None of these
104
ALLEN Social Science
15. Which one of the following manufacturing indus- 20. What are measures to control environmental deg-
tries provide employment to millions in India ? radation?
(1) Iron & steel (2) Petroleum (1) Proper fuel selection
(3) Cotton textile (4) Cement (2) Use of oil instead of coal
16. Which one of the following cities is known as (3) Treatment of liquids
electronic capital of India ?
(4) All of the above
(1) Srinagar (2) Noida
21. The chemical industries contribute _________% of
(3) Bangaluru (4) Pune
the production of entire manufacturing sector.
17. The first modern steel plant was set up at
(1) 18 (2) 16 (3) 10 (4) 14
Jameshpur in which year ?
22. India produces over 600 million tonnes of _______
(1) 1907 (2) 1908
per annum.
(3) 1909 (4) 1910
(1) Aluminium (2) Copper
18. In which states we found 50% of sugar ?
(3) Lead (4) Tin

N
(a) Gujarat (b) Uttar Pradesh
(c) Maharashtra (d) West Bengal 23. Fertiliser Corporation of India (FCI) was established
in which year
(1) Both (a) & (b) (2) Both (b) & (c)

E
(1) 1952 (2) 1951
(3) Both (a) & (d) (4) Both (b) &(d)
(3) 1950 (4) 1949
19. The first plant of fertiliser industry was set up at

L
_________ in Tamil Nadu. 24. India is the second largest producer of
(1) Ranipet (2) Anmoor (1) Two-Wheeler (2) Three-Wheeler

L
(3) Arcot (4) Thrivuvaalan (3) Four-Wheeler (4) None of these

A
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

ANSWER KEY
Qu e. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
An s . 2 4 2 3 1 3 3 3 4 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 1 2 1 4
Qu e. 21 22 23 24
An s . 4 1 2 2

105
Class X ALLEN
23. LIFELINES OF NATIONAL ECONOMY
“Efficient means of transport are pre-requisites for fast development.”
“Transport, communication and trade are complementry to each other.”
n Transportation
l Roadways
Importance
Classification of Roads -
} On the basis of their capacity
(i) Golden Quadrilateral Super Highway (ii) National Highway (iii) State Highways
(iv) District Roads (v) Other Roads (vi) Border Roads
} on the basis of the type of material used for their construction

N
(i) Metalled roads (ii) Unmetalled roads
Road Density - National average 75 km
Problems

E
l Railways
Importance

L
Indian Railway network
Factors influencing the distribution pattern of the Railway network in the country Problems faced by Railways

L
l Pipelines
Importance

A
Important networks of pipeline transportation in the country
l Waterways
Importance
Waterways that have been declared as the National Waterways by the Government of India
Major Sea ports.
l Airways
Importance
Private Scheduled airlines and non-scheduled operators
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

n Communication
l Personal Communication
} Indian Postal Networks - First class mail & Second class mail
} Indian Telecom Networks
l Mass Communication
Includes Radio, Television, Newspapers, Magazines, Books and Films.
n International Trade
Balance of Trade - Favourable and unfavourable balance of trade Commodities of Export and import
l Tourism as Trade
Importance of Tourism, Contribution in Foreign exchange, Major Tourist destinations in India.

106
ALLEN Social Science
LIFELINES OF NATIONAL ECONOMY EXERCISE
1. In India after independence which major port was 10. Trade between two or more countries is said to be
developed first (1) external trade (2) local trade
(1) Jawahar Lal Nehru Port (3) internal trade (4) international trade
(2) Kandla Port 11. The principal mode of transportation of freight and
(3) Vishakhapatnam Port passengers in India are
(4) Mumbai Port (1) inland waterways (2) airways
2. The following is the list of ports located along the (3) railways (4) roadways
east coast of India.
12. Which one of the following organizations constructs
(A) Paradeep (B) Kolkata
Border roads in India ?
(C) Vishakhapatnam (D) Tuticorin
(1) PWD (2) CPWD (3) BRO (4) NHAI
Which one of the following is the correct sequence
13. Which one of the following pairs of public sector
ports from south to north ?
joint companies runs telephone network in India ?
(1) C.D.B.A (2) D.C.A.B

N
(1) Airtel-Hutch
(3) B.A.D.C (4) A.C.D.B
(2) Bharti Telecom-C-DEC
3. Which port was developed in the wake of less of

E
Karachi port ? (3) MTNL-BSNL
(1) Mumbai (2) Paradeep (4) Reliance-Tata
(3) Kandla (4) Marmagoa 14. The National waterways between Allahabad and

L
4. Which one of the following is the longest highway ? Haldia is located on

(1) National Highway-1 (2) National Highway-2 (1) Brahmaputra river (2) Ganga river

L
(3) National Highway-7 (4) National Highway-8 (3) Damodar river (4) Komman river
5. World has become a global village due to : 15. In India, the first steam engine traveled between
(1) International trade _______ and ________ in 1853.

A
(2) Transport and communication (1) Nagpur ; Pune
(3) Engineering Industry (2) Chittaranjan ; Jalpaigudi
(4) Electronic industry (3) Mumbai ; Pune
6. Which one of the following is the largest public sector (4) Mumbai ; Thane
undertaking in the country ? 16. Which one of the following is true about, Pradhan
(1) DDA (2) NTPC Mantri Grameen Sadak Yojana ?
(3) Railways (4) Roadways corporation (1) A scheme for development of National Highway
7. Tuticorin port is located in (2) A scheme for Border Roads
(1) Karala (2) Tamil Nadu
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

(3) A scheme for village road connection


(3) Goa (4) pondicherry (4) A scheme for mountain road
8. Which one of the following region in india is
17. The major highway project in India are implemented
accessible favourably by air travel ?
by which one of the following ?
(1) Northern part of India
(1) CPWD (2) PWD
(2) Southern Hills
(3) NHAI (4) NCR
(3) North-Eastern States
18. Delhi to Chennai link is known by the name of
(4) Central India
(1) Golden Quadrilateral
9. Which one of the following is the cheapest mode
if transport in India ? (2) North-South Corridor
(1) Pipelines (2) Waterways (3) East-West Corridor
(3) Railways (4) Airways (4) Sher Shah Suri Marg

107
Class X ALLEN
19. Which two of the following extreme locations are 28. Which one of the following is the premier iron
connected by the east-west corridor ? ore exporting sea port of the country ?
(1) New Mangalore (2) Vishakhapatnam
(1) Mumbai and Nagpur
(3) Marmagao (4) Paradip
(2) Mumbai and Kolkata
29. Which one of the following is considered as
(3) Silcher and Porbandar
the First Class Mail by the Indian postal network ?
(4) Nagpur and Siliguri (1) Cards and envelopes
20. Indian tourism promotes (2) Registered periodicals
(1) national integration (2) rural beckwardness (3) Book packets
(3) economic disparity (4) localization of industries (4) Registered newspapers

21. Which one of the following places is not covered 30. Which one of the following groups of cities is con-
nected by the National Highway No. 1 ?
by the gas pipeline in India ?
(1) Delhi - Amritsar (2) Delhi - Kolkata
(1) Hazira (2) Jugdishpur
(3) Delhi - Mumbai (4) Varanasi - Kanyakumari
(3) Kota (4) Lucknow

N
31. Which one of the following modes of transpor-
22. _________ is the largest producer of feature films tation reduces tran-shipment losses and delays in
in the world. the supply of petroleum and gases ?

E
(1) South Korea (2) India (1) Railways (2) Roadways
(3) USA (4) England (3) Pipeline (4) Waterways
23. In which of the following fields India has emerged 32. District Roads are maintained by :

L
as a gaint at the international arena ? (1) PWD (2) Zila Parishad
(1) Engineering industry (3) CPWD (4) BRO

L
(2) Software technology 33. Distribution pattern of railway networks gets influ-
enced by
(3) Heritage tourism
(1) physiographic factors
(4) Exchange of commodities

A
(2) economic factors
24. Deepest landlocked port is located at (3) administrative factors
(1) Kochi (2) Vishakapatnam (4) All of these
(3) Bombay (4) Chennai 34. Which are two extreme locations?
25. The total route length of railways in India is : (1) Amritsar and Tuticorin
(1) 83,589 km (2) 63,221 km (2) Srinagar and Tiruvananthapuram
(3) 60,371 km (4) 1,08,486 km (3) Srinagar and Tuticorin
26. Which is the extreme south-western port located (4) Srinagar and Kanyakumari
at the entrance of a lagoon with a natural harbour? 35. This port accounts for about 50% of India’s iron
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

ore export.
(1) Tuticorin (2) Chennai
(1) Marmagao (2) Kochi
(3) Kochi (4) New Mangalore
(3) Surat (4) Vishakhapatnam
27. Which one of the following is not true regarding the
36. Which one of the following is the oldest artificial
sea ports of India ?
port of the country ?
(1) Mumbai is the biggest port with a spacious
(1) Tuticorin (2) Vishakhapatnam
natural and well sheltered harbour.
(3) Chennai (4) Mumbai
(2) Tuticorin Port in Tamil Nadu has a natural
37. This organisation was established in 1960 for the
harbour and hinterland.
development of roads of strategic importance in
(3) Vishakhapatnam is the deepest landlocked north-eastern border areas.
and well protected port. (1) NHAI (2) BRO
(4) Chennai is an inland riverine port. (3) ICAI (4) DHAI
108
ALLEN Social Science
38. In which year was the air transport nationalised 44. The difference between exports and imports is
in India ? known as the balance of
(1) 1951 (2) 1952 (1) trade (2) economy
(3) 1953 (4) 1963 (3) Industry (4) None of these
39. Which one of the following ports is an inland river- 45. Which of the following is the biggest port of India
ine port ? with a spacious natural and well sheltered harbour ?
(1) Kolkata (2) Tuticorin (1) Mumbai Port
(3) Mumbai (4) Kandla (2) Jawaharlal Nehru Port
40. National Waterway No. 1 is navigable between (3) Kandla Port
which of the following places ? (4) Marmagao Port
(1) Between Sadiya and Dhubri 46. The HVJ natural gas pipeline connects?
(2) Between Allahabad and Haldia (1) Hazira, Vijaipur, Jagdishpur
(3) Between Kottapuram and Komman (2) Hazira, Bareli, Jemshedpur

N
(4) Between Udyogamandal and Champakkara (3) Hazira, Bokaro, Jaipur
41. Which are the terminal stations of National (4) None of these

E
Highway No. 7 ?
47. Which one of the following ports was developed in
(1) Srinagar and Kanyakumari order to relieve the pressure of Kolkata port ?
(2) Porbandar and Silchar

L
(1) Paradip port (2) Tuticorin port
(3) Delhi and Kolkata (3) Haldia port (4) Chennai port
(4) Varanasi and Kanyakumari

L
48. Which one of the following ports is a tidal port ?
42. STD refers to : (1) Mumbai (2) New Mangalore port
(1) Sururban Telephone Dialling (3) Kandla (4) Vishakhapatnam

A
(2) Subsciber Trunk Dialling 49. Which among the following sea ports was planned
(3) Social Telephone Distributor to decongest the Mumbai port ?
(4) Speed Telephone Dialling (1) Goa port (2) Marmagao port
43. These roads are constructed and maintained by (3) Jawaharlal Nehru port (4) Kandla port
state and central government 50. They bind the economic life of the country as well
(1) Surfaced Roads as accelerate the development of the industry and
(2) Unsurfaced Roads agriculture.

(3) Metalled Roads (1) Railways (2) Airways


(3) Waterways (4) Pipelines
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

(4) Unmetalled Roads

ANSWER KEY
Qu e. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
An s . 2 2 3 3 2 3 2 3 2 4 3 3 3 2 4 3 3 1 3 1
Qu e. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
An s . 4 2 2 2 2 1 4 3 1 1 3 2 4 4 1 3 2 3 1 1
Qu e. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
An s . 4 2 2 1 1 1 3 3 3 2

109
Class X ALLEN
24. POPULATION
n Concepts
l People are themselves resources with varying qualities.
l Population is the point of reference from which all other elements are observed and from which they derive
significane and meaning.
l The Census of India provides us with information regarding the population of our country.
n Population size and distribution
l Uttar Pradesh accounts for about 16 per cent of the country’s population.
l India’s population as in March 2001 stood at 1,028 million accounting for 16.7 per cent of the world’s
population.
l Population density is calculated as the number of persons per unit area.
l Population density is affected by relief of the area.
n Population growth and processes of population change

N
l The numbers distribution and composition of the population are constantly changing.
l Growth of population refers to the change in the number of inhabitants of a country/territory during a
specific period of time.

E
l When more than a billion people increases even at lower rate, the total numbers added becomes very large.
l The declining trend of the growth rate is indeed a positive indicator of the efforts of birth control.

L
l The number of death per thousand persons in a year is the Death Rate.
l Migration is the movement of people across regions and territories.

L
l Migration changes not only population size but also the population composition of urban and rural
population in terms of age and sex composition.
l The age composition of a population refers to the number of people in different age groups in a country.
l The population of a nation is generally grouped into three broad categories, namely children (generally

A
below 15 years), working age (15-59) years) and aged (above 59 years)
l Sex ratio is defined as the number of females per thousand males in the population.
l The sex ratio in India has always remained unfavourable to females.
l A person of seven years of age or above who is able to read and write a certain understanding is called a
literate.
l The distribution of the population according to different types of occupation is referred to as the occupational
structure.
l Primary activities include agriculture, animal husbandry, forestry, mining and quarrying etc. Secondary activities
include manufacturing industry, building and construction work etc. Tertiary activities include transport,
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

communication, commerce, administration and other services.


l Sustained efforts of government programmes have registered significant improvements in the health conditions
of the Indian population.
l It is a matter of concern that the per capita calorie consumption is much below the recommended level in
India.
l Adolescents population constitutes one fifth of the total population of India
l Adolescents In India face the problem of malnutrition that can be dealt with by spreading awareness. literacy
and education among them.
l The Family Welfare Programme has sought to promote responsible and planned parenthood on a voluntary
basis.
l National Population Policy 2000 aims at improving conditions of adolescents, aiming at encouraging delayed
marriages and child bearing, eduacting about risks of unprotected sex and provisions for nutritional needs.

110
ALLEN Social Science

POPULATION EXERCISE
1. Secondary activity means 10. The correct definition of ‘birth rate’ is
(1) extraction of natural resoures (1) Movement of people acroos regions and
(2) processing territories

(3) banking (2) No. of live births per thousand persons in a year.

(4) collection of information (3) Number of person increased in per 100 of the
base population.
2. The following state groups have the highest and the
lowest rate of literacy (4) No. of deaths per thousand persons in a year.
11. According to the census 2001, a ‘Literate’ person
(1) Kerala - Bihar
is one
(2) Tamil Nadu- Andhra Pradesh
(1) who can read his/her name
(3) Gujarat and Maharashtra
(2) who can write any language
(4) Jammu and Kasmir-Arunachal pradesh
(3) who can read and write his/her name
3. Group of countries having higher average popula-

N
(4) who is 7 years old and can read and write any
tion density than India is
one language with understanding
(1) China-Afghanistan (2) Pakistan-China
12. The census describes

E
(3) Bangladesh-Japan (4) China-Mynmar
(1) only counts of number of people
4. Number of deaths per thousand persons in a year
(2) only migration in states
is called the

L
(3) holistic approach towards counting, professions
(1) death rate (2) birth rate
economic and social conditions of people.
(3) migration rate (4) annual growth rate
(4) only deaths in a population of contry.

L
5. The union territories in India that has better sex- 13. Activity that involves agriculture, fishing and gath-
ratio in the year 2001 is ering is called
(1) Lakshdweep (2) Delhi (1) secondary activity (2) tertiary activity

A
(3) Chandigarh (4) Pondicherry (3) primary activity (4) quaternary activity
6. Number of years that an average person survives 14. Which state of India has the lowest density of popu-
is called lation?
(1) population density (2) life expectancy (1) Arunachal Pradesh (2) Uttar Pradesh
(3) birth rate (4) death rate (3) Punjab (4) Assam
7. The annual growth rate in population is related to 15. Lakshadweep has only about
(1) high birth rate (1) six states (2) five states
(2) high migration rate (3) seven states (4) eight states
(3) increase in age compostion 16. The difference between the birth rate in the year
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

(4) decline in population 2001 was


8. Dependency ratio is affected by (1) 432 persons per sq km.
(1) percentage of working population. (2) 243 persons per sq km.
(2) percentage of children population. (3) 342 persons per sq km.
(3) percentage of female population. (4) 324 persons per sq km.
(4) percentage of male population. 17. Smallest country in the world is
9. Primary activities include (1) Monaco (2) Nauru
(1) Construction work (3) Vatican City (4) Tuvalu
(2) Mining 18. Civil services is a part of

(3) Communications (1) tertiary sector (2) primary sector

(4) Administration services (3) secondary sector (4) industrial sector


111
Class X ALLEN
19. Density of population in Arunachal Pradesh is 29. The main cause for the high growth of our popula-
(1) 13 persons per sq km. tion is
(2) 40 persons per sq km. (1) Rise in death rate (2) Decrease in birth rate
(3) 80 persons per sq km. (3) Decline of death rate (4) None of these
(4) 100 persons per sq km. 30. What is the average sex ratio of India as per 2001
20. Number of females per 1000 males in the popula- census ?
tion is called (1) 900 (2) 933
(1) birth rate (2) death rate (3) 923 (4) None of these
(3) growth rate (4) sex ratio 31. 16% of Inda’s population is present in the state of
21. Number of birth per 1,000 people is known as (1) West Bengal (2) Maharastra
(1) growth rate (2) death rate (3) Uttar Pradesh (4) Bihar
(3) literacy rate (4) birth rate 32. India may overtake China in population growth in
22. One of the most densely populated countries of the the year
world is (1) 2035 (2) 2045

N
(1) China (2) Pakistan (3) 2050 (4) 2020
(3) India (4) Sri Lanka 33. What was the population density of India according
23. to 2001?

E
An indicator of socio-economic development in a
country is (1) 124 person/km2 (2) 224 person/km2
(1) occupational structure (3) 324 person/km2 (4) 24 person/km2

L
(2) literacy 34. A large proportion of children in a population is a
(3) rural-urban composition result of :

L
(4) sex composition (1) High birth rate
24. One of the components of population growth is (2) High death rate
(1) age composition (2) sex ratio (3) High life expectancies

A
(3) migration (4) occupational structure (4) More married couples
25. Almost half of India’s population lives in 35. The number of people in different age groups is
(1) six states (2) five states referred as :
(3) seven states (4) eight states (1) Sex ratio
26. Which among the following is included in the policy (2) Age composition
framework of NPP 2000 ? (3) adolescent population
(1) imparting free and compulsory school educa- (4) occupational structure
tion above 14 years age
36. Which is the most populous country of the world?
(2) reducing infant mortality rate
(1) India (2) United States
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

(3) acheiving universal immunisation of children


(3) China (4) Russia
against all vaccine preventable diseases
37. As per 2001 census, which of the following states
(4) all of these
has the least density of population?
27. Which movement of the people across regions and
(1) West Bengal (2) Bihar
teritories does not change the size of the popula-
tion ? (3) Arunachal Pradesh (4) Uttar Pradesh
(1) Internal (2) External 38. Name the Union Territory having the highest den-
(3) Death rate (4) Birth rate sity of population.

28. What is the rank of India among the population of (1) Chandigarh
different countries of the world? (2) Delhi
(1) First (2) Second (3) Puducherry (Pondicherry)
(3) Third (4) Fourth (4) Daman and Diu

112
ALLEN Social Science
39. In how many years is the official enumeration of 45. Which state is the most populous state according to
population carried out for census? 2001 Census?
(1) 1 year (2) 5 years (1) Bihar (2) Uttar Pradesh
(3) 10 years (4) 2 years (3) West Bengal (4) Madhya Pradesh
40. Which of the following is an important social indica- 46. The Himalayan state, Sikkim, has a population of
tor to measure the extent of equality between males about
and females in a society at a given time? (1) 0.3 million (2) 0.4 million
(1) Age Composition (2) Literacy Rate (3) 0.2 million (4) 0.5 million
(3) Sex Ratio (4) Death Rate 47. ‘Demography’ is the study of
41. Which of the following factors are responsible for (1) infrastructures
sparse population?
(2) changing numbers of births, deaths, diseases in
(1) Flat plains and abundant rainfall a community over a period of time
(2) Rugged terrain and unfavourable climate (3) human rights

N
(3) Fertile soil and abundant rain fall (4) human behaviour
(4) Rugged terrain and favourable climate 48. The country that has a higher population density
42. Name the state having the highest percentage of than India is :

E
literacy level : (1) China (2) USA
(1) Kerala (2) Maharashtra (3) Britain (4) Bangladesh

L
(3) Punjab (4) West Bengal 49. The total area of India accounts for how much per-
43. What year is considered a great demographic di- cent of the world's area?
vide in India?

L
(1) 2.4 percent (2) 16.7 percent
(1) 1911 (2) 1921 (3) 3.28 percent (4) 1.02 percent
(3) 1931 (4) 1751 50. Which of the following migration of population

A
44. The magnitude of population growth refers to : does not change the size of the population?
(1) The total population of an area (1) External migration
(2) The number of persons added each year (2) Internal migration
(3) The rate at which the population increases (3) International migration
(4) The number of females per thousand males (4) National migration
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography

ANSWER KEY
Q ue . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans . 2 1 3 1 4 2 1 2 2 2 4 3 3 1 2 1 3 1 1 4
Q ue . 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Ans . 4 3 1 3 2 4 1 3 3 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 3 2 3 3
Q ue . 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Ans . 2 1 2 2 2 4 2 4 1 4

113
114
Class X

A L L
Important Notes

E N
ALLEN

CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\03_Geography


ALLEN Social Science

25. BASIC CONCEPTS

n Introduction
There are some words in Economics which have special meaning These words are called basic concepts. Some
of the basic concepts of concepts of Economics are as given below :
n National Income
National income is defined as the sum total of factor incomes viz. rent, wages, interest and profit accruning to
the normal residents of a country. When we express the result of economic activities as the sum total of market
value of final goods and services produced in a country during one year, it is known as National Product.
l Definition
l Example
Net National Income = Groos National Income – Deprection
n Per capita Income

N
Per Capita income is an important concept regarding the Country’s economic welfare or standard of living of
the people.

E
l Definition : Per capita income is defined as the average income earned by the people of a country in a
definite period of time.
l Example

L
Per capita income is calculated by dividing the national income by population i.e.

L
National Income
Per capita income =
Population

Per capita income at current prices is known as monetary per capita income or at constant prices it is known

A
as real per capita income
n Consumption
The word consumption is used in two senses.
l Definition : Consumption means expenditure made on consumption during one year in an economy.
l Example
} Average Propen Propensity to consume (APC) : The ratio of toal consumption to total income is
called average propensity to consume.

Consumption
Average Propensity to Consume =
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

Income

} Marginal Propensity to Consume (MPC) : The ratio of change in consumption to change in income is
called marginal propensity to consume i.e.

Change in Consumption
Marginal Propensity to Consume =
Change in Income

n Saving
After deducting consumption from income whatever amount remains it is called saving.
Saving = Income – Consumption
l Definition : Saving depends on level of income. Propensity to save of two tyes : (i) Average Propensity to
save (ii) Marginal Propensity to save.

115
Class X ALLEN
} Average Propensity to Save (APS)

Saving
Average Propensity to Save (APS) =
Income

} Marginal Propensity to Save (MPS)

Change in Saving
MPS :
Change in Income

n Investment
When production is more than consumption during an accounting year, that is called Investment.
n Introduction
l Types of Investment
} Induced investment

N
} Autonomous investment
n Capital Formation

E
Meaning : The meaning of word capital formation is taken in two senses
} Limited Meaning of Capital Formation

L
} Broader Meaning of Capital Formation
l Definition : Capital formation takes place at a time when part of current income is saved and the same is
invested to increase in future income and output.

L
n Disguised Unemployment
More people are doing the same work which can be done by few people. Thus unemployment is disguised in this
way.

A
n Full Employment
The full employment means a situation in which generally all the people get employment who are willing to
work at the prevailing rates of wages.
n Intelation
In relation ot price level ‘inflation’ means constant rise in prices. In Economics, the constant rise in prices is
called inflation.
n Supply of Money
Generally money supply means currency and deposits of banks available with the people of the country.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

n Government Budget
Every government prepares the detailed account of its estimated revenue and expenditure. It is called Govern-
ment Budget.
l Types of Budget
} Balanced Budget
} Surplus Budget
} Deficit Budget
n Deficit Financing
Deficit financing is the method by which government meets the budgetary deficits by taking loans from the
Central Bank. Central Bank. Central Bank meets this deficit by printing new currency notes.

116
ALLEN Social Science
n Publicfinance
Public Finance means the financial sources of the government i.e. revenue and expenditure. That portion of
economics in which the problems of revenue and expenditure are discussed is called pubic finance.
l Sources of Income of Government : The main sources of income of government are taxes which are of
tow types :
} Direct tax
} Indirect tax
n Public debt
Every government takes many types of loans in order to meet its expenses. There loans are called public debts.
n Poverity Line
The concept of poverty line means that money which is necessary for an individual for the minimum level of
consumption.
n Growth rate
l Definition : Growth rate is that percentage rate from which it is known that in comparison to one year how

N
much percentage change has taken place in national income or per capita income in any other year.
n Foreign Aid

E
l Definition : Foreign Aid means capital investment, loans and grants in any country by foreign govts, foreign
individuals, foreign trade organisations, foreign banks and international institutions.
l Types of Foreign Aid

L
} Foreign Capital
} Foreign Loans

L
} Foreign Grants
n Balance of Payment
The account of receipts and payments of the govt of one country from other countries during a period ofn one

A
year is called Balance of Payments.
n Monetary Policy
l Definition : Monetary policy is related to affect the level and structure of aggregate demand by controlling
the rate of interest and the availability of credit.
l Methods of Monetary Polcy
} Bank Rate
} Open Market Operations
} Change in Minimum Reserve Ratio
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

} Change in Liquidity Ratio


} Change in Marginal Requirement of Loan
n Fiscal Policy
To achieve the pre-determined objectives, the policy of the govt regarding income expenditure and credit is
called fiscal policy.
l Method of Fiscal Policy
} Public Income
(i) Taxes
(ii) Public debt
(iii) Deficit Financing
} Public Expenditure

117
Class X ALLEN
BASIC CONCEPTS EXERCISE
1. _________ is defined as the sum total of factor 10. Which situation refers when nobody is unemployed ?
income. (1) Full employment
(1) National Income (2) GDP (2) Disguised employment
(2) Both (1) & (2) (4) none of these (3) Capital formation
2. ________ is another term synonymous to National (4) Underdeveloped
Income.
11. What are the different types of unemployment
(1) National Price (2) National Product under full employment situation?
(3) National Factor (4)all of these (1) Voluntary Unemployment
3. If the quantity of national product is multiplied by (2) Frictional Unemployment
the current price we call it national at ____. (3) Seasonal Unemployment
(1) Current price (2) Monetary Income (4) All of these

N
(3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these 12. Which unemployment arises due to the change in
4. ________ is defined as the average income earned the techniques of production.

E
by the people of a country in a definite period of (1) Technical (2) Structural
time.
(3) Seasonal (4) Frictional
(1) Net National Income

L
13. _______ is a continuous and extreme rise in general
(2) Gross National Income price level.
(3) Per Capita Income (1) Inflation (2) Deflation

L
(4) All of these (3) Price Index (4) Supply
5. Consumption depends on many factors like 14. Indian Government generally presents its budget
________ on Feb 28th of every year.

A
(1) Income (2) Price of commodity
(1) Rajya Sabha (2) Lok Sabha
(3) fashion (4) all of these
(3) Vidhan Sabha (4) Vidhan Parishad
6. The ratio of total consumption to total income is
called______. 15. Every Government prepares the detailed account
of its estimated revenue and expenditure it is called
(1) Average propensity to consume
(1) Private Budget (2) Public Budget
(2) Average proper to continue
(3) Government Budget (4) None of these
(3) Average propensity to conservation
16. A _______ is that budget in which revenue and
(4) Average propensity to country
expenditure of the government are equal.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

7. The difference between income and consumption (1) Surplus Budget (2) Balanced Budget
is called _____.
(3) Deficit Budget (4) All of these
(1) Average (2) Economy
17. Which items of revenue included in the budget of
(3) Saving (4) Amount Government of India?
8. What are the examples of Investment? (1) Corporation tax (2) Excise duty
(1) Machines (2) Tools and Equipment (3) Central sale tax (4) all of these
(3) Raw- materials (4) All of these 18. India has been resorting to deficit financing from
9. Investments depend upon factors the ____.

(1) Rate of profit (2) Rate of Interest (1) Fifth Five Year Plan (2) Sixth Five Year Plan

(3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these (3) Seventh Five Year Plan(4) None of these

118
ALLEN Social Science
19. In India, the major portion of the Deficit financing 25. _____ are taken from foreign countries, trade
is met by taking loans from the _____. organization and international institutions.
(1) Central Bank of India (1) Public loans (2) Private loans
(2) Reserve Bank of India (3) Foreign loans (4) none of these
(3) Punjab Bank of India 26. Which main methods of monetary policy are
(4) None of these adopted by central bank?

20. Public expenditure includes ______. (1) Open Market Operations

(1) Administration (2) Defence (2) Change in Minimum Reserve Ratio

(3) Education (4) All of these (3) Change in Liquidity Ratio

21. Public finance includes revenue of government (4) All of these


i.e____. 27. What are the objectives of Fiscal Policy ?
(1) Tax (2) Interest (1) Economic development

N
(3) Profit (4) All of these (2) Price Stability
22. Every government takes many types of loans in (3) Exchange Rate Stability
order to meet its expenses. These loans are called

E
(4) All of these
(1) Public Income (2) Public Expenditure
28. During depression central bank purchases _____.
(3) Public Debt (4) Public Finance

L
(1) Securities (2) bonds
23. Minimum needs include minimum human necessities
(3) shares (4) Property
of ____.

L
29. What are Direct tax?
(1) Food (2) Clothing
(1) Imposed on Income (2) Imposed on Wealth
(3)Housing (4) All of these
24. Expert Committee appointed by the Planning (3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these

A
Commission in ____had adopted the minimum 30. Government can control depression and inflation
consumption order to fix the poverty line. by making changes in public ____.
(1) 1956 (2)1962 (1) Expenditure (2) Revenue
(3)1953 (4)1964 (3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 1 2 3 3 4 1 3 4 3 2 4 1 1 2 3 2 4 4 2 4
Que. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Ans. 4 4 4 2 3 4 4 3 3 3

119
Class X ALLEN
26. ECONOMIC INFRASTRUCTURE OF THE INDIAN ECONOMY

n Introduction
Every man as a consumer and producer, for the satisfaction of his wants demands not only goods but services as
well. For example, a consumer demands not only food, clothing and housing, Radio or refrigerators etc but he
demands the services like health, educational and transport etc. as well. Such services are called consumer
services.
n Meaning of Infrastructure
The part of the Capital stock of the economy which is necessary from the viewpoint of providing various kinds of
services is called infrastructure.
l Importance of Infrastructure : According to World Development Report, 1994, “ The sufficient awailability
of infrastructure will be helpful in determining the success of one country and failure of another, in the
diversification of production, expansion of business, solution of the problem of growth of population, reduc-

N
tion of poverty and improving the environmet.”
n Economic Infrastructure refers to that capital stock which offers various types of productive services directly
to the producers.

E
l Transport and Communication : Transport system of nay country means all the different modes of
transport which are used to early people and goods from one place to the other,

L
l Mean of Transport

} Railways

L
} Road Transport
} Water Transport

A
} Air Transport

l Means of Communication : Means of communication are to be considered as a part of both social as well
as economic infrastructure. Post, Telegraph, Telphone, Radio Television Fax, Cinema, Newspaper and
Magazines etc are the important means of communication in India.
n Electric Power
Electric power or Electricity occupies very significant place in the economic infrastructure of every country. The
quantum of electricyt consumed by a country is being, considered as the index of its industrialisation and eco-
nomic development.
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

(i) Thermal Power


(ii) Hydel Power and

(iii) Nuclear Power


l Irrigation : These means of irrigation for agriculture purpose is evident from the following factors.
} Uncertainty of Rainful

} Unequal Distribution of Rainfall


} Timing or Duration of Rainfall
} Large Irrigational Projects or Multipurpose River Projects
} Minor Irrigation Projects

120
ALLEN Social Science
n Banking and Other Financial Institutions
Monetary economic infrastructure in Indian economy means banking system, non-banking institutions, capital
market and the controller of all these i.e. RBI (Reserve Bank of India).
l Money Lender
l Reserve Bank of India
l Commercial Banks
l Specific Banking Institutions
l Non-Banking Financial Institions

l Stock-Exchange
n Consumer Exploitation and Protection
l Consumer Exploitation : Adulteration, sub-standard packed goods, use of non-standard weights or mis-
leading and fabricated advertisements and unfair Monopolistic and Restricted Trade Practices (MRTP) are

N
such activities which exploit the consumers in a large extent.
l Meaning of Consumer Protection : Consumer protection means the protection of the buyers of consum-

E
ers goods from the exploitation of the unfair trade practices of the producers.

l Methods of Consumer Protection : For protecting consumers interests from all categories of producers,

L
Consumers Protection Act, 1986’ was passed and this act came into force from 1987. This act covers all
goods and services other than those specifically exempted by the central government.

l Consumer Education : To protec the interests of the consumers, it is very much essential to educate them.

L
Consumers are appriesed of the possible unfair trade malpractices of short-weights and measures, aducation
and the like. To arouse awarencess among the consumers publication of ‘Upbhokta Jagran’ (consumer
awareness) was launched in 1991.

A
l Consumer Organisation : Today, there are about 500 consumer organisatio. These organisations have
contributed a lot to proted the interests of the consumers.

n Public Distribution system

l Definition : Through Public Distribution System Government distributes the necessities of life like foodgrains,
sugar, kerosene, coarse cloth etc. at concessional prices through Fair Price shops at fixed quantity to the
general public especially to the poor sections of the society.

l Constrituents of Public Distribution System


} Procurement at Minimum Prices
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

} Buffer stock
} Fair Price Shops

121
Class X ALLEN
ECONOMIC INFRASTRUCTURE OF THE
INDIAN ECONOMY EXERCISE
1. The part o the Capital stock of the economy which 10. After which year the various private companies have
is necessary from the viewpoint of providing various also entered in air transport sector?
kinds of services is called _______. (1) 1993 (2)1992
(1) Capital formation (2) Infrastructure (3)1994 (4)1995
(3) Industries (4) All of these
11. Which play an important role in spread of education
2. Economic infrastructure refers to the capital stock and knowledge of the people ?
which offers various type sof productive services
(1) Radio (2) Television
directly to the ____.
(3) Cinema (4) All of these
(1) Producer (2) Consumer
12. What are the important sources of power in India?
(3) Exporter (4) Importer
(1) Thermal Power (2) Hydel Power
3. Which are the notable services related to economic

N
infrastructures? (3) Nuclear Power (4) All of these

(1) Transport and communication 13. Which projects have helped in increasing the

E
generation of Hydro-electric power in India ?
(2) Electric Power
(3) Banking and other Financial Institution (1) Multi-purpose River Valley Projects

L
(4) All of these (2) Agricultural Projects

4. Which systems are used to early people and goods (3) Nuclear Projects
from one place to another? (4) None of these

L
(1) Transport (2) banking 14. In which states, there is a complete rural electrification ?
(3) Communication (4) none of these (1) Himachal Pradesh (2) Haryana

A
5. The first railway line in India was made in 1853 (3)Gujarat (4) All of these
between ___.
15. Which bank was established in the 1935 ?
(1) Bombay to Pune (2) Bombay to Madras
(1) Reserve Bank of India
(3) Bombay to Thane (4) Bombay to Meerut
(2) State Bank of India
6. Indian Railway ranks which position in the world?
(3) Punjab National Bank
(1) 1st (2) 4th (3) 8th (4) 10th
(4) HDFC
7. The water transport is divided into
16. What were established to meet the credit
(1) Inland Water Transport
requirements of the industrial sector?
(2) Coastal Water Transport
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

(1) Industrial Development Bank of India


(3) Sea Transport
(2) Indian Industrial Finance Corporation
(4) All of these
(3) Small Industries Development Bank
8. Who occupies the 16th position in the World?
(4) All of these
(1) Indian Shipping (2) Air Lines
17. What are the two notable examples of non-banking
(3) Road Lines (4) None of these
financial institutions in India ?
9. Water transport is facilitated through various
(1) Unit Trust of India
harbours (port) at
(2) Life Insurance Corporation
(1) Mumbai (2) Kolkata
(3) Both (1) & (2)
(3) Chennai (4) All of these
(4) None of these

122
ALLEN Social Science
18. How the producers and traders exploit the consumers? 22. Which organization has contributed a lot to protect
(1) Mis-information regarding quality of the product the interests of the consumers?
(1) Consumer Direction Society, Mumbai
(2) Adulteration
(2) Consumer Action Forum, Kolkata
(3) Use of non-standard products
(3) Citizen's Forum
(4) All of these
(4) All of these
19. To protect the interest of the consumers and small 23. What are the three constituents of Public Distribution
producers from the monopolists and big producers, System in India?
'Monopoly and Restrictive Trade Practices Act' was
(1) Procurement at Minimum Prices
passed in ____ in India
(2) Buffer Stock
(1) 1969 (2) 1970
(3) Fair Price Stock
(3) 1971 (4) 1972 (4) All of these
20. Consumer Disputes Redressal Forums have been 24. In India the supply of essential commodities of life
established at the ____. is less than demand because of

N
(1) District (2) State (1) Inadequate Production
(3) National (4) All of these (2) Lack of warehouses and selling facilities

E
21. Which forum decides the complaints involving an (3) Hoarding
amount which is between 5 lacs and 20 lacs? (4) All of these

L
(1) District forum (2) State forum 25. Which problems are expected to arise under
(3) National forum (4) None of these poverty?
(1) Starvation (2) Mal-nutrition

L
(3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these

A
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 2 1 4 1 3 4 4 1 4 2 4 4 1 4 1 4 3 4 1 4
Que. 21 22 23 24 25
Ans. 1 4 4 4 3

123
Class X ALLEN
27. AGRICULTURAL DEVELOPMENT IN INDIA
n Introcuction
India is considered to be an agrarian economy because 68% of its population is still dependent on agriculture of
livelohood.
n Meaning of Agriculture
The term “Agriculture” in English language is derived from two words, ‘Agri’ means field and ‘Culture’ means
cultivation.
n Importance of Agriculture in Indian Economy
Importance of agriculture to the economy of the country is clear from the following factors.
l Contribution in National Income
l Source of food Supply

N
l Agriculture and Employment
l Agriculture and Industry

E
l Source of Livelihood
l Agriculture and Foreign Trade

L
l Internal Trade
l Transport

L
l Government Income
l Capital Formation
n Main Problems of Indian Agriculture

A
l Human Problems
} Pressure of Population on Land
} Social Atmosphere
l Institutional Problems
} Small size of Holdings
} Land Tenure System
l Techanical Problems
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

} Inadequate Irrigational Facilities


} Old Agricultural Implements
} Traditional Technique of Cultivation
} Lack of improved seeds
} Lack of Manure
} Defective Agricultural Marketing System
} Diseases of Crops and Attacks of Pests
} Lack of Credit Facilities
} Weak Cattle

124
ALLEN Social Science
n Role of Government in Agricultural Growth

Government of India has played the following important role in the development of agriculture.

l Land Reforms

l Increase in Area Under Cultivation

l More Irrigational Facilities

l Reforms in Delivery system

l Agricultural Research And Development

l Development of Agricultural Land

l Improvement of Animal Husbandry

l Improvement in Agricultural Marketing

l Proper Agricultural Price Policy

N
l Credit Facilities

l Aggriculture and Five Year Plans

E
In the five year plans, about Rs. 32,500 crores have been incurred on agricultural development.

n Green Revolution

L
The term Green Revolution is a combination of two words - “Green” and “Revolution”. Green stands for
greenery. Revolution means so sudden and fast changes that the spectators were wounder-struck. This term has

L
been used for the progress of agricultural production.

l Main Elements of the Success of Green Revolution

A
} High Yielding Varieties of Seeds

} More use of Chemical Fertilizers

} More Irrigational Facilities

} Use of Modern Agricultural Machinery

} More Credit Facilities

} New Techniques of Agriculture

} Plant Protection Measures


CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

} Price Incentives

n Main Effects of Green Revolution

l Solution of food Problem

l Effect on Rural Employment

l Reduction in Import of Food grains

l Development of Industries

l Effect on Prices

In short, the main aim of the Green Revolution is to satisfy the hunger of hungry people and to accelerate the
rate of economic growth.

125
Class X ALLEN
AGRICULTURAL DEVELOPMENT IN INDIA EXERCISE
1. Who considered the agriculture as 'Soul of India'? 9. Which council is the most prominent institute among
(1) Jawaharlal Nehru all agricultural research institutes of the country?
(2) Mahatma Gandhi (1) ICAR (2) ICDP
(3) Subhash Chandra Bose (3) IBRD (4) IRDC
(4) Narendra Modi 10. How many agricultural universities have been
2. Which commission has rightly said, 'Development opened in India?
of agriculture is most essential for the success of (1) 25 (2) 26 (3) 27 (4) 28
the plans'?
11. Which societies have been established for improving
(1) Planning Commission agricultural marketing?
(2) Agriculture Commission
(1) Regulated Market
(3) Development Commission
(2) Co-operative Marketing
(4) None of these

N
(3) Agriculture Marketing
3. Industries get raw materials like _____from
(4) Agricultural policy
agriculture sector.
(1) Cotton (2) Jute 12. Which agricultural products have been selling by

E
Government through the Fair Price Shops under
(3) Sugarcane (4) All of these
Public Distribution System?
4. What is the main source of livelihood of Indian

L
(1) Grains (2) Sugar
farmers ?
(3) Oil (4) All of these
(1) Agriculture (2) Transport
13. In which year, National Bank for Agricultural and

L
(3) Small Business (4) Dairy faming
Rural Development (NABARD) was established to
5. Into which categories the problems of Indian grant huge loans for agricultural development?
agriculture can be divided?
(1) 1985 (2)1984

A
(1) Human Problems (2) Institutional Problems
(3)1983 (4)1982
(3) Technical Problems (4) All of these
14. In which plan, expenditure on agricultural
6. In post-independence era, which system was legally
development amounted to Rs.2320 crores and
abolished? production of food grains increased to 1047 lakh
(1) Ryotwari System (2) Niz System tones?
(3) Permanent System (4) Zamindari System (1) First Five Year Plan
7. What are the technical problems in Indian (2) Second Five Year Plan
Agriculture? (3) Third Five Year Plan
(1) Inadequate Irrigational Facilities (4) Fourth Five Year Plan
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

(2) Old Agricultural Implements 15. Which term has been used for the progress of
(3) Lack of improved seeds agricultural production?
(4) All of these (1) White Revolution (2) Green revolution
8. After independence, Government has introduced (3) French Revolution (4) Social revolution
which significant relating to land reforms? 16. Which institute in New Delhi has also made lot of
(1) Abolition of Zamindari System contribution in regard in bringing the Green
(2) Acts have been passed to improve land tenure Revolution?
system (1) Indian Agricultural Research
(3) Maximum ceiling on the land holdings has been (2) Industrial Agricultural Research
fixed (3) India Agro Remote
(4) All of these (4) Indian Agro Revolution

126
ALLEN Social Science
17. The credit of bringing Green Revolution in India 19. The Government has established ______ to fix the
goes to minimum prices of food grains.
(1) Dr.Norman E. Borlaugh (1) Agricultural cost (2) Prices Commission
(2) Dr.M.S.Swaminathan (3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these
(3) Both (1) & (2) 20. What effects has been brought by green revolution
(4) None of these on the economy of India?
18. In Punjab, about _____ hectares of land is cultivated (1) Solution to Food Problem
by HYV seeds. (2) Effect on Rural Employment
(1) 58 Lakh (2) 56 Lakh
(3) Development of industries
(3) 55 Lakh (4) 52 Lakh
(4) All of these

E N
L L
A
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 2 1 4 1 4 4 4 4 1 3 4 4 4 4 2 1 2 3 3 4

127
Class X ALLEN
28. INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT IN INDIA
n Introduction

For economic progress of underdeveloped countries like India, industrialisation occupies an important place.
Only through industrial development by increasing the rate of production and employment the rate of growth of
Indian economy can be increased.

l Need for Rapid Industrialisation

} Help in Establishment of Balanced Economy

} Increase in Employment

} Increase in National Income

} Less Pressure of Population on land

} Essential for National Defence

N
} Self-dependence

} Production of Socially Usefull Goods

E
n Growth of Industrialisation in India

India ranks 10th in the industrialised countries of the world. The main features of the same are as follows.

L
l Strong Industrial Base

L
l Modernisation

l Development of Public Sector

l Building Up of Infrasture

A
l Increasing Share of Industries in National Income and Exports

l Increase in Foreign Collaborations

l Increase in Industrial Production

l Present Industrial Structure

} Public Sector, Joint-Sector and Private Sector

} Non-Factory Manufacturing Units


CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

} Factory Manufacturing Units

(a) Fera Companies

(b) MRTP Companies

n Cottage Industries

“Cottage industries are those industries which are completely or partially run by the members of a family either
asa whole time business or as a part time business”. Mostly these type of industries are run by the artisans in their
homes.

l Small Scale Industries

Meaning : Small scale industries were defined on different basis but since June, 1997 all those factories
were included in small industries which have an investment of Rs.3 crores in fixes capital.

128
ALLEN Social Science
l Importance of Small-Scale and Cottage Industries
} More Employment
} Equal Distribution of Wealth

} Decentralisation
} Increase in Production
} Exports
} Use of Local Resources
} Less Pressure of Population on Agriculture
} Suitable for under-developed country like India

} Artistic Goods
} Individula Taste

N
} Complementary of Large Industries.
} Experience from Foreign Countries

E
l Problems of Cottage and small Scale Industries

} Problem of Raw Material and Power

L
} Problem of Finance

} Old Methods of Production

L
} Problems of Marketing

} Competition with Large Scale Industries

A
l Measures For Improvement

} Restricted Production Programme

} Purchase by Government

} Financial Help

} Marketing Facilities
} Technical Assistance
} Technical Assistance
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

} District Industries Centres

} Industrial Estates
l Other Concessions
n Large Scale Industries
l Classification of Large Scale Industries

} Basic Industries
} Capital Goods Industries

} Intermediate Goods Industries


} Consumer Goods Industries

129
Class X ALLEN
l Importance of Large Scale Industries
} Production of Capitalistic and Basic Goods
} Economic Infrastructure
} Research And High Technique
} Increase in Productivity
} Availability of Economies
} Establishment of Ancillary Industries
n Causes for Slow Progress of Industrial Development of the Country
l Foreign Rule
l Scarcity of Capital
l Shortage of Skilled Workers
l Shortage of Cheap Energy Resources

N
l Shortage of Efficient Managers
l Shortage of Raw Material

E
l Poverty
l Shortage of Financial Organisation

L
l Unplanned Development
l Less Development of Transport and Communication

L
n Role of Government for Encouragement of Industrial Development in India
l Public Sector Outlya During Five Year Plans and Increase in Industrial Production Growth
l More Credit Facilities

A
l Establishment of Basic Industries
l Development of Means of Transport
l Development of Power Sector
l Invention Promotion and Import Substitution

CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

130
ALLEN Social Science
INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT IN INDIA EXERCISE
1. The need for rapid and balanced growth of 10. Which companies make production on large scale
industrialization is due to many causes and use foreign exchange in a larger quantity?

(1) Help in establishment of balanced economy (1) FERA (2) MRTP

(2) Increase in Employment (3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these

(3) Increase in National Income 11. What are the importances of industries?

(4) All of these (1) Employment opportunities

2. About how much percentage of Indian population (2) Artistic costly goods are also produced
depends on agriculture? (3) Tendency of shifting population from villages to cities
(1) 80% (2)70% (3)90% (4)55% (4) All of these
3. Which industries cab be established for the security 12. What are the various measures have been taken

N
of the country? up for the development of cottage industries?
(1) Iron (2) Steel (1) Khadi and Village Industries Commission

E
(3) Aeroplanes (4) All of these (2) Economic assistance is given to promote sales
4. Industrial development makes provisions for the (3) Improvement in designs and to boost up their
production of essential goods in the ______.

L
production and sales
(1) Country (2) state (4) All of these

L
(3) district (4) Panchayat 13. What are the importance of Small scale and cottage
5. The percentage contribution of industries has been industries?
increasing in _____ of India . (1) More Employment

A
(1) GDP (2) National Income (2) Equal Distribution of wealth
(3) Production (4) None of these (3) Decentalisation
6. In India,How much percentage of total exports is (4) All of these
contributed by industries? 14. What has been divided into smaller pieces because
(1) 55% (2) 45% (3) 65% (4) 90% more population is dependent on agriculture?

(1) Land (2) Labour


7. In which foreign countries, Indians have established
different industries? (3) Physical capital (4) Working capital
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

(1) Malasia (2) Indonesia 15. In which country 83% of population work In small
and cottage industries?
(3) Nepal (4) All of these
(1) USA (2) India
8. Which sector are jointly owned by the government
and the private sector? (3) Sri Lanka (4) Japan

(1) Public Sector (2) Co-operative Sector 16. What are the main problems of Cottage and Small
Scale Industries?
(3) Joint Sector (4) Primary Sector
(1) Problem of raw material
9. The production techniques of many industries have
been improved by _______ of Industries. (2) Problem of Finance

(1) Modernization (2) Privatizations (3) Problem of marketing

(3) Liberalization (3) All of these (4) All of these

131
Class X ALLEN
17. What improvement measures should be done by 21. After partition of the India there was a shortage of
small scale and cottage industries? ____.
(1) Restricted Production Programme (1) jute (2) Cotton
(2) Financial Help
(3) both (1) & (2) (4) None of these
(3) marketing Facilities
22. In which cities most of the large scale industries
(4) All of these
were set up?
18. What have been set up in all states by Small
Industries Development Organisation ? (1) Mumbai (2) Kolkata
(1) Small Industries Service Institution (3) Delhi (4) All of these
(2) Small Indian Service Institution 23. What are the main energy resources in India?
(3) Small Independent Service Institution
(1) Coal (2) Oil
(4) Small Industries Society Institution
(3) Electricity (4) All of these
19. In India large scale industries have been classified
into 24. In India, the process of first Five Year Plans was

N
(1) Capital Goods Industries started in ____.
(2) Intermediate Goods Industries (1) 1952 (2) 1953

E
(3) Consumer Goods Industries
(3) 1954 (4) 1951
(4) All of these
25. Which financial institution was set for providing loans

L
20. The _____ government followed the Discriminating
to industries?
Protection policy.
(1) French (2) English (1) ICICI (2) IDBI

L
(3) Indian (4) Dutch (3) SIDCO (4) All of these

A CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 4 2 4 1 2 2 4 3 1 1 4 4 4 1 4 4 4 1 4 2
Que. 21 22 23 24 25
Ans. 3 1 4 4 4

132
ALLEN Social Science
29. INDIA’S FOREIGN TRADE
n Introduction
Foreign trade is the trade between one country and the other countries. Good sent from one countr to the others
are called Export.
n Importance of Foreign Trade
l Full Utilization of Natural Resources
l Encouragement of Industrialisation
l Improvement in International Co-operation and Harmony
l Availability of Cheap Goods
l Geographical Development
l Improvement in Production Capacity

N
l Importance of Imports
} To meet the Shortage of Essential Consumer Goods
} To meet the need of capital Goods

E
} To obtain Important Inputs
l Importance of Exports

L
} Export of Surplus Producton
} To obtain Foreign Exchange

L
n Volume of Foreign Trade
n Main Exports and Imports of India

A
l Chief Items of Imports
} Machinery
} Iron and Steel
} Non-Ferrous Metals and Metal Products
} Petroleum and Petroleum Products
} Transport Equipments
l Main Items of Exports
} Jute Products
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

} Tea
} Cloth and Apparels
} Metalkic Ores
} Spices
} Leather and Leather Products
} Oil Caks
n Directions of Imports and Exports
By directions of imports and exports is meant, the countries from where India imports and the countries from
where India Exports her goods. Before independence, India’s main trade was with England and other Common-
Wealth countries.

133
Class X ALLEN
INDIA’S FOREIGN TRADE EXERCISE
1. Goods that a country gets from other countries are 9. In India the use of fertilizers is very essential for
called _____. increasing

(1) Import (2) Export (1) Agricultural Production

(3) Transport (4) None of these (2) Industrial Production

2. The difference between the value of export and (3) Land Production
import of all types of goods, services and capital (4) Labour production
from a country during one year period is called
10. After 1947, India suffered serious shortage in the
_____.
production of ___.
(1) Balance of Trade (2) Balance of Payment
(1) Transport (2) Foodgrain
(3) Balance of Services (4) None of these
(3) Land (4) Economy
3. What is the importance of foreign trade?

N
11. Which countries export the engineering goods?
(1) Full utilization of Natural Resources
(1) Malasia (2) Indonesia
(2) Encouragement of Industrialization

E
(3) Sri Lanka (4) All of these
(3) Availability of cheap goods 12. Who are the main buyers of leather and leather
(4) All of these goods ?

L
4. What is the importance of Import for Indian (1) USA (2) France
economy? (3) Germany (4) All of these

L
(1) To meet the shortage of essential consumers 13. In which year the import trade in India with England
goods decreased to 25 % and with America it increased
to 30% ?

A
(2) To meet the need of capital goods

(3) To obtain important inputs (1) 1948-50 (2) 1947-48

(4) All of these (3) 1954-55 (4) 1978-79

5. In which year, India's total foreign trade was of 14. What is the full form of OPEC ?
Rs.186 Crore? (1) Organisation of Petroleum Exporting Countries
(1) 1935 (2) 1932 (3) 1934 (4) 1936 (2) Organisation of Petroleum Exporting Companies

6. Which countries imported machinery ? (3) Organisation of Petroleum European Countries

(1) Amercia (2) England (4) Organisation of Petroleum Exporting Chemical


CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

(3) Japan (4) all of these 15. What is the full form of EEC?

7. India is still not self-sufficient in the production of (1) European Exporting Community
_____. (2) European Economic Companies
(1) Timber (2) Copper (3) European Economic Community

(3) Iron and steel (4) bauxite (4) European Economic Commodity

8. Which non-ferrous metals were imported in India? 16. In 1980-81 the share of oil exporting countries with
India 's export trade was _____%.
(1) Copper (2) Tin
(1) 15.4 (2) 12.4
(3) Zinc (4) All of these
(3) 13.4 (4) 19.4

134
ALLEN Social Science
17. India import paper from countries like ____. 19. In Export trade of India, Who occupies the first
(1) Sweden (2) Czechoslovakia position?

(3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these (1) E.U (2) USA
18. India entered into trade relation with new countries (3) Argentina (4) Canada
like ___. 20. Jute manufactured products are mostly exported
(1) Kenya (2) Argentina to_____.
(3) Belgium (4) All of these (1) America (2) Russia
(2) Britian (4) All of these

E N
L L
A
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 1 1 4 4 3 4 3 4 1 2 4 4 2 1 3 2 3 4 1 4

135
Class X ALLEN
30. ECONOMIC PLANNING IN INDIA
n Introduction

l Definition : Economic planning is a process under which set objectives of economic development are sought
to be achieved in a determinate period of time keeping in view the available resources of the country.
Economic planning refers to that process wherein (i) a central planning authority, (ii) Keeping in view the
resources of the country, (iii) in a given period of time (iv) seeks to achieve pre-determined objectives and (v)
makes an effort to control economic factors. to formulate the plans in India, the Planning Commission was set
up in 1950.

n Need of Planning

It is because of the following reasons that India has adopted the path of economic development.

l Vicious Circle of Povertyu

l Efficient use of Resources

N
l Balanced Structure of Production

l Development of Infrastructure

E
l Problem of Human Resources

L
n Objectives of Planning

The main objectives of economic planning in India as :-

L
(i) Economic development and (ii) Social Justice

n Progress under plans or Achievements Under Planning

l Economic Development or Increase

A
l Increase in Per Capita Income

l Increase in the Rate of Capital Formation

l Institutional Reforms in Agriculture and Green Revolution

l Development of Industries

n Failures of Plans

l No substantial increase in the Standard of Living


CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

l Rise in Prices

l Increase in Unemployment

l Less Growth in Productive Sectors

l Inequality in the Distribution of Income and Wealth

n Main objectives of Eighth Five Year Plan

(i) To achieve thw growth rate of 5.6 percent per annum.

(ii) To achieve the goal of full employment by the end of 20th century.

(iii) To reduce the growth rate of population.

(iv) To eliminate illiteracy among the people in the age group of 15 to 35 years.

136
ALLEN Social Science
l Expenditure and Target of Eighth Five Year Plan
In this plan about 12.7% of total expenditure on public sector was to be spent on agriculture and 11% on
irrigation, 26 percent on industries and 18 percent on energy and social services.
l Main Achievements of Eighth Five Year Plan
} Growth Rate
} Progress in Agriculture Sector
} Increase in Industrial Production
} Increase in Foreign Trade

} Check on Inflation
} Increase in Rate of Saving
} Ninth Five Year Plan (1997-2002)

E N
L L
A
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

137
Class X ALLEN
ECONOMIC PLANNING IN INDIA EXERCISE
1. Who started the series of Five year plan for the 9. What are the main indicators of economic
removal of poverty and to achieve the goal of development ?
economic growth with social justice?
(1) Increase in the rate of growth of real national income
(1) Government of India (2) Government of USA
(2) Increase in the rate of growth of real per capita income
(3) Government of Japan (4) Government of China
(3) Increase in the Standard of living of the people
2. Eighth Five Year plan commenced in 1992 and it
(4) All of these
was completed in ___.
10. What are the aspects of the social justice?
(1) 1997 (2) 1998
(3) 1999 (4) 2000 (1) To reduce the inequalities in distribution of income

3. The Ninth Five Year plan has completed on ___. (2) Balanced development of agriculture

(3) economic development of the weaker and

N
(1) 31st March 2001 (2) 31st March 2002
backward section of the society
(3) 31st March 2003 (4) 31st March 2004
(4) All of these
4. The Planning Commission was set up in ____.

E
11. The rate of capital formation depends on the rate
(1) 1950 (2) 1951
of ______.

L
(3) 1952 (4) 1954
(1) Saving (2) Investments
5. Economic planning refers to that process
(3) Both (1) & (2) (4) all of these

L
(1) Central Planning authority
12. The progress in different sectors of Indian economy
(2) Keeping in view the resources of the country during the period of planning is as follows
(3) To make an efforts to control economic factors. (1) Increase in National Income

A
(4) All of these (2) Increase in Per capita Income
6. What are the following reasons that India has
(3) Increase in Rate of Capital formation
adopted the path of economic development?
(4) all of these
(1) Vicious Circle of Poverty
13. ______ reduced from 25 per thousand in 1951 to
(2) Efficient Use of resources
just 8.5 per thousand in 1998
(3) Balanced Structure of Production
(1) death rate (2) birth rate
(4) All of these
(3) both (1) & (2) (4) none of these
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

7. ___ is very much essential for the development of


14. What are the failures of Indian Plans ?
means of infrastructure.
(1) Rise in prices
(1) Economic Growth
(2) Economic Planning (2) Increase in Unemployment

(3) Economic Development (3) No substantial increase in the standard of living

(4) Economic balance (4) All of these

8. Which sector does not have enough capacity to 15. Green Revolution was actually reduced to ____
develop all sectors of the economy? revolution.

(1) Public Sector (2) Private Sector (1) Wheat (2) Rice

(3) Joint Sector (4) Cooperative Sector (3) Both (1) & (2) (4) None of these

138
ALLEN Social Science
16. An export team of _____ observed that the main 19. What are main objectives of Eighth Five Year Plan?
shortcoming of Indian Planning was with reference
(1) To achieve the growth rate of 5.6 % per annum
to its implementation.
(2) To achieve the goal of full employment by the
(1) U.N.O (2) U.S.A
end of 20th century
(3) U.A.E (4) None of these
(3) To achieve the growth rate of population
17. Which was in 1991 badly disrupted our economy?
(4) All of these
(1) Battle of Plassey (2) Battle of Buxar
20. What was the main objective of Eighth Plan?
(3) Gulf war (4) Guerrilla War
(1) Human Resources
18. In which years the entire economy was out of gear
due to the failure of monsoons? (2) Physical capital
(1) 1965-65 (2)1966-67 (3) Land Resources
(3) 1979-8 (4) all of these (4) Water Resources

E N
L L
A
CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

ANSWER KEY
Que. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Ans. 1 1 2 1 4 4 2 2 4 4 3 4 1 4 3 1 3 4 4 1

139
140
Class X

A L L
Important Notes

E N
ALLEN

CBSE-2022\Module\DLP NTSE Adv. 10th\Punjab\Social Science-1\04_Economics

You might also like